JP7153113B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a game machine, for example, a pinball game machine, a winning lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole, and when the lottery is won, a profit state such as a winning game advantageous to the player is provided. It is designed to occur. Regarding this type of gaming machine, illegal nail adjustment has been carried out in many pachinko parlors in the past, and the actual situation is that it arouses the gambling spirit of the players. In response to this, manufacturers have developed game machines with measures to prevent nail adjustment (see, for example, Patent Document 1), but it is difficult to say that sufficient results have been achieved. There is a trend to thoroughly prohibit the tacitly approved nail adjustment, etc., and it is necessary to inspect whether the ball output performance of the game machine deviates from the original performance due to the nail adjustment, etc.

JP 2017-144042 A

Therefore, it is necessary to provide a gaming machine with a performance display device that displays performance information (for example, a base value, etc.) based on game results so that the performance of the game can be easily grasped. However, there are strict legal restrictions on the program capacity of game machines and the control of games. It is important to reduce the control burden.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the control load of the game machine when the performance display device as described above is provided.

The above objects of the present invention are achieved by the following means.
(1) Lottery means for executing a lottery for winning based on the establishment of the starting condition;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a winning game control means for controlling to a winning game;
information display means capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on game performance;
information display control means for controlling the information display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The information display control means is
After the power is turned on, a confirmation display for displaying a first display based on the first data and a second display based on the second data alternately for a predetermined time as a confirmation display for confirming the operation on the information display means. and a predetermined information display process for displaying the predetermined information on the information display means after executing the confirmation display for a predetermined time,
a first information storage area for storing an operation timer for timing execution time of the confirmation display;
a second information storage area for storing a switching timer for timing switching between the first display and the second display in the confirmation display;
configured to execute switching processing between the first data and the second data when the switching timer reaches a predetermined value;
configured to initialize the operation timer of the first information storage area and the switching timer of the second information storage area after power-on including recovery from power failure ;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the performance display device.

1 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board and production|presentation button of the same game machine. It is a block diagram showing a control device of the gaming machine. It is a figure where it uses for description of the game state transition of the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game state according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop relationship of the special symbols 1 and 2 in the simultaneous variation type according to the gaming machine and the front/back relationship of the display performance of the special symbols. It is a flow chart showing the first half of the main control side main processing according to the gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the second half of the main control side main processing according to the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between the input information of the setting key switch, the RAM clear switch and the door opening switch and the value of the W register, and the correspondence between the input information and the transition process. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing operation confirmation timer setting processing in FIG. 8B; FIG. FIG. 8B is a flow chart showing an initial setting process in FIG. 8A; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a first power failure check process (A) in FIG. 8A and a second power failure check process (B) in FIG. 13; FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing a setting change process in FIG. 8A; FIG. FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process in FIG. 8B; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing according to the gaming machine. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer management processing in FIG. 13; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing 1 in FIG. 13; 14 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing 2 in FIG. 13; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a starting port check process in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 16. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a game state information transmission process in FIG. 18; FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a big hit determination process in FIG. 18. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a small hit determination process in FIG. 18; FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing variation pattern creation processing in FIG. 18; FIG. 15. It is a flowchart which shows a process during special design fluctuation|variation in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation in FIG. 23. FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation in FIG. 23. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the first half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the second half of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 15. FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing setting abnormality check processing in FIGS. 17 and 18; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing performance display monitor processing in FIG. 13; FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a trial firing test signal terminal management process in FIG. 28; FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing out-of-area RAM clear check processing in FIG. 28; FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing operation confirmation processing in FIG. 28; FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing display data update processing in FIG. 28; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production during the normal state and during the jackpot game according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect during the jackpot game according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect at the end of the big win game and during the small win game according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect during the latent certainty state and during the big hit game according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect at the end of the jackpot game related to the gaming machine and during the normal state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect during the jackpot game according to the gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the production in the normal state according to the gaming machine. It is a time chart of the outer end output signal according to the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern distribution table selection table according to the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a big hit variation pattern distribution table according to the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a loss variation pattern distribution table for special figure 1 according to the same gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern distribution table according to the same gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the identification display part LED data table (a), and the decimal value LED data table (b) which concern on the same gaming machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display state of the performance indicator during various game periods related to the gaming machine;

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Overview of Configuration: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of a game board.

A pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "game machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. As shown in FIG. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is released. , to release the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 and open to the front side.

Under the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper receiving tray unit 8 also has a ball ejection button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and a game ball dispensing device (not shown) for dispensing game balls. A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a performance button 13 (first operation means) and a direction key 75 (second operation means) which are operable by the player. The former production button 13 mainly becomes operable (input reception possible) when the built-in lamp is lit during a predetermined input acceptance period (production button monitoring period), and when the built-in lamp (button LED 13b) is lit (input If a predetermined operation (press, repeated hits, long press, etc.) is performed during the acceptance period, it is possible to bring about a change in a specific effect. The latter direction key 75 is in the shape of a cross key as shown in FIG. By operating these direction instruction buttons, it is possible to display a setting screen related to the game, and change and set the volume setting, the light amount setting, the effect mode setting, and the like.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 .

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the shooting operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). A plurality of decorative lamps 45 (full-color LEDs: LEDs for light production) are provided at appropriate locations on the glass door 6 to exhibit light production effects by light decoration. A plurality of full-color LEDs (light effect LEDs) as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko game machine, that is, around the front frame periphery of the glass door 6, and are referred to herein as "surrounding LEDs 45". is called

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described. As shown in the figure, on the game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the shot game ball is mounted in an annular shape as a board surface partitioning member. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. This liquid crystal display device 36, under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variable display areas), independently a plurality of numbers, characters, symbols, etc. Various decorative patterns (for example, left pattern (corresponding to left display area), middle pattern (corresponding to middle display area), right pattern (corresponding to right display area)) variable display operation (variable display and stop display) The performance is displayed as an image.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 (flow distribution means) is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long way. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and is fixed to the game board 3. and an armor frame portion 48b that surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. As shown in FIG. Between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5, a play area through which the game ball can pass is formed, and the game ball is guided to the right side of the center decoration 48 as well. A game ball hit by the shooting device 32 to the upper side of the game area 3a is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b according to the strength or stroke length of the game ball's launch. It flows down either the left downflow route 3b or the right downflow route 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as various function display portions, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is displayed in the middle start port 34 and the right start port 33 (first special pattern). ), and a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second Special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is executed by the variable display operation of the "special symbol". In the liquid crystal display device 36, in time synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative symbols by images are variably displayed, along with various advance notice effects (effect images). , a decorative symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

In addition, in the various function display units, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged. Composite is called 5 special patterns 1, 2, display of the number of operation pending balls of normal patterns, state notification during variable time reduction function (during time saving) and during high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol variation display game is executed by a normal symbol variation display operation represented by two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbols by the LED alternately turn on and off in a seesaw manner, and by stopping with one side lit up, the propriety of the normal symbol variable display game is made clear. there is Further, a right-handed display device 39b by one LED is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b uses a combination of lit/unlit states of the LEDs to indicate whether or not "right-handed" is advantageous in aiming for the game ball to pass through the right flowing path 3c. It informs whether "left-handed" aiming to pass through is advantageous. If the LED is lit, it is reported that the right-handed player has an advantage.

Below the center decoration 48, a middle starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) is provided, and inside it is a detection sensor 34a (middle starting port) that detects the passage of the game ball. sensor 34a: see FIG. 3) is formed. Below the middle starting hole 34, a plurality of general winning holes 43 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board surface (in the case of this embodiment, three on the left side), and each inside contains a game ball. A general winning hole sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the is formed.

The middle starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). 1") is a winning opening for the special symbol 1 related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and does not have a starting opening opening and closing means (a means for opening or expanding the starting opening) "fixed winning rate type It is configured as a prize winning device. In the case of this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, game nail (not shown), windmill 44, center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path to the middle start port 34 A game ball that has flowed down the path 3b is configured to easily enter (win a prize), while a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to enter. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, as with the middle starting port 34, a right starting port 33 for the special symbol 1, which will be described later, is provided as a prize winning port related to the condition for starting the variable display operation of the special symbol 1.

Further, above the middle part of the right flow path 3c, there is provided a link gate 57 (specific passage area) consisting of a passage gate through which game balls can pass. The combination gate 57 is a passing area for executing a round game when a big hit is made, and a combination gate sensor 57a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is formed in the inside thereof. .

A normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passing gate is provided below the winning combination gate 57, similarly to the winning combination gate 57. As shown in FIG. This normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to normal symbol fluctuation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided. is formed.

Below the normal symbol starting port 37, there are a special variable winning device 42 for big wins (first special electric accessory: first big winning means), a normal variable winning device 41 functioning as a so-called electric tulip, and a small winning. Lower special variable winning device 52 for use (second special electric accessory: second big winning means), lower right starting port 35 for special symbol 2 described later, so that they are sequentially located downward in this order is provided. These five players are arranged in a staggered pattern as a whole, with the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the rightmost side of the game board, followed by the normal variable winning device 41, the upper special variable winning device 42, the lower right starting port 35, and the lower right starting port 35. It is displaced inside in order of the lower special variable winning device 52 and is located.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a variable winning rate type winning device capable of varying the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening by the opening opening/closing means. In the case of this embodiment, it exists as a right starting port 33 (first special symbol starting port: second starting means) having a horizontally long opening for two game balls or more, and a lid covering this right starting port 33. A movable piece 47 projecting and retractable from the game board surface is provided, and when the movable piece 47 is in an advanced state protruding from the game board surface, the right starting port 33 is closed (closed state) and is in a retreating state on the game board surface. When the right starting port 33 is opened (open state). When the normal variable prize winning device 41 is in a non-operating state (normal state), the movable piece 47 is in a projecting state and the right starting port 33 is closed (a state in which winning is difficult or impossible), but the normal variable prize winning device When 41 is in the operating state, the movable piece 47 moves backward and leaves the right starting port 33 to open the right starting port 33 (easy winning state). As a result, the laterally long opening of the right starting port 33 appears, and the shape changes so that many game balls are picked up. Inside the right starting hole 33, a detection sensor 33a (right starting hole sensor 33a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball is provided, and a picked-up game ball is detected by this sensor.

The right starting port 33 provided in the normal variable winning device 41, like the middle starting port 34, wins according to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). In the present embodiment, when the movable piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (non-winning state) is maintained in which winning of the right starting port 33 is disabled.

The function of the above-described normal variable prize winning device 41 is the same as that of a so-called "electric tulip type prize winning device (abbreviated as electric chew)" having a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) on the starting port. . Therefore, in this specification, the normal variable winning device 41 is also abbreviated as "electric chu" in some cases. The configuration of the normal variable winning device 41 is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, a fixed winning rate type winning device such as the middle starting port 34 (first starting port), and a variable winning rate winning device (second starting port) in which the winning area is expanded or opened by the starting port opening and closing means may be configured as a general electric tulip-type prize winning device in which are provided above and below. In this case, even if the first right start opening is configured as a special figure 2 (or special figure 1), and the second right start opening is configured as a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) Alternatively, both of them may be configured as a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1). Alternatively, a movable piece having a width corresponding to one game ball may be protruded from the game board so that the movable piece picks up the game ball and guides it to the guide gutter on the back surface of the game board.

In addition, the lower right starting port 35 on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 41 is the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). abbreviated as "Special Figure 2") is a special symbol 2 winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation. device”.

In the right flow path 3c, an upper special variable prize winning device 42 for a big hit is provided in the middle of the flow path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable prize winning device 41 (electric chew). The upper special variable prize winning device 42 is provided with an upper large prize winning port 40 and a projecting-type open door 42b covering it, and the upper large prize winning port 40 can be opened and closed by projecting the open door 42b into the game board surface. Inside the upper big winning hole 40, an upper big winning hole sensor 42a (see FIG. 3) is formed for detecting a game ball that has entered. The upper surface of the open door 42b of the upper special variable winning device 42 for big hits is inclined downward to the right, and the game ball on the open door 42b is guided down to the normal variable winning device 41 (electric chew) side. It's like

Above the upper special variable winning device 42, between the normal symbol starting port 37 and crossing the area of the right flow path 3c, a horizontally long flow path correction plate 37d inclined downward to the left is provided. there is This flow path correction plate 37d receives the game ball flowing down the right flow path 3c and functions to move the game ball toward the upper special variable winning device 42 (left direction in FIG. 2). The lower left end of the flow path correction plate 37d is above the upper special variable winning device 42. As shown in FIG. Therefore, all game balls are picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and guided to the upper special variable winning device 42. - 特許庁

Further, below the upper special variable prize winning device 42 and between the normal variable prize winning device 41, a horizontally elongated flow-down guide plate 40d inclined downward to the left is provided. The upper right end of the flow-down guide plate 40d is located near the lower end of the open door 42b of the upper special variable prize winning device 42, and the game ball that has flowed down from the open door 42b and has its direction changed by the guide nail directly below. , picks up a part of it and makes it flow down onto the lower special variable prize winning device 52 .

The lower special variable prize winning device 52 for the small win is configured to be able to open or expand the lower special prize winning port 50 by means of a lower big prize winning port 50 and a retractable opening door 52b covering the lower big winning prize port 50.例文帳に追加, and a lower special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the lower special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

The process of entering the ball into the upper prize winning opening 40 at the time of a big hit is as follows. A game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 flows down the right flow path 3c. All game balls are picked up by the flow path correction plate 37 d and guided onto the upper special variable winning device 42 . In the case of a big hit, the upper big prize winning opening 40 is opened. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, almost all game balls enter the upper big prize winning opening 40 from the flow path correction plate 37d.

Also, the process of entering the ball into the lower big winning opening 50 at the time of a small hit is as follows. The game ball flows down the right downflow path 3c. The game ball is guided in the direction of the upper special variable winning device 42 by the flow path correction plate 51d. The game ball rolls on the open door 42b closing the upper big prize opening 40 and flows down from the lower right end. Most of the game balls are guided toward the normal variable winning device 41 by a predetermined arrangement of game pegs (not shown), and some of them are guided toward the lower big winning opening 50 on the flow-down guide plate 40d. The opening time of the right starting port 33 by the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is 3.7 seconds (3 times of opening of 1.2 seconds + 2 times of opening of 0.5 seconds) in the variable probability state and the time saving state. , as short as 0.1 seconds in normal and latent states. Therefore, more game balls are guided to the lower special winning opening 50 side without being picked up during the open period of the right start opening 33. - 特許庁

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, the middle start hole 34 is 4, the right start hole 33 is 1, the lower right start hole 35 is 2, and the upper big win hole 40 (big win big win hole) is 15 pieces, 10 lower big winning openings 50 (large winning openings for small winning), 6 general winning openings 43, 0 normal symbol start openings 37 (no prize balls)) are game ball payout device 19 (Fig. 3) is paid out. The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG. Here, "winning" does not mean that the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening consists of a pass-through gate (for example, the normal symbol start opening 37 ), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, the winning hole is "winning". is treated as having occurred. A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning hole, it will be detected by the winning detection switch. Regardless of whether or not a game ball enters a winning hole, it may be referred to as "winning".

In addition, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged in the area of the game board at positions that do not interfere with the flow of game balls. In this example, a first movable accessory (watch-shaped accessory) 80 is disposed on the upper right side of the center decoration 48, that is, at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball through the right flow path 3c. A second movable accessory (flower-shaped accessory) 90 is arranged on the side. These movable accessories function as a production means, and realize a movable body production such as suggesting the degree of expectation for winning a prize by its operation mode.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling game operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the outline of the control device.

The control device of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that controls overall game operations (game operation control). , a production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as “production control unit 24”) that receives production control commands from the main control unit 20 and comprehensively controls the execution of production (appearance control) by production means. , a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling the payout of prize balls, and an external power supply (not shown) to generate and supply necessary power (including backup power) to each board of the gaming machine. A power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) and a power supply board are included. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24 . A power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing game operation control procedures, a ROM 202 (main control unit) for storing various data necessary for game operation control ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory are mounted, and the whole constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to the Z80 system).

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant period, and a time measurement function, and provides an interrupt signal to the CTC and CPU. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU by detecting power on/off, power failure, etc., and a control program A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors operation abnormalities, a designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range, a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. In addition, at least the main control unit (payout control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive the voltage drop signal received from the power supply board, thereby starting execution of necessary backup processing prior to power shutdown, game operation can be resumed after power-on (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, it is possible to hold the memory contents of each RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at predetermined timings, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 obtains the numerical value indicated by the random number generating circuit as a random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit (magnitude of random number: 65536)). , the random number is used for the jackpot lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number, in order to prevent cheating such as hitting a winning game.

The main control unit 20 includes a middle start opening sensor 34a for detecting winning at the middle starting opening 34, a right starting opening sensor 33a for detecting winning at the right starting opening 33, and a winning at the lower right opening opening 35. Lower right start opening sensor 35a to detect, normal symbol start opening sensor 37a to detect passage of game ball to normal symbol start opening 37, upper large winning opening sensor 42a to detect winning to upper large winning opening 40, It is discharged from the game machine through the lower special winning opening sensor 52a that detects winning to the lower special winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning opening 43, the out opening 49, and each winning opening. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting game balls (so-called out balls) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from the sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning hole the game ball has won (entered).

The main control unit 20 also includes a combination gate sensor 57a for detecting passage of a game ball to the combination gate 52, a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and a pachinko game controller (not shown). A fraud detection sensor (a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor, etc.) for detecting fraudulent activity with respect to the machine 1 is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these sensors. Fraud detection sensors are placed in appropriate locations to detect fraudulent activity.

The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 47 of the right starting port 33, and an upper special prize opening solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 42b of the upper special prize opening 40. 42c is connected to a lower special prize winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the lower special prize winning opening 50, and the main control section 20 can transmit control signals for controlling these.

A special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. . Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of normal symbols.

Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c and a round number display device (not shown), and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling the display of various information displayed thereon. It has become. A right-handed display device 39b is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 determines whether the game ball is advantageous in "right-handed" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c. It is possible to transmit a control signal for informing whether or not "left-handed hitting", in which the ball passes through the left flow path 3b, is advantageous.

A frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 receives predetermined game information (for example, winning game start information, prize winning information for the starting port) from the frame external terminal board 21. (Special pattern fluctuation start information), number of prize balls information, specific error information (vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.) It has become. The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to a data counter DT and hall computer HC provided outside the game machine, and the signal (outer end signal) output from the frame external terminal board 21 is It is sent to this data counter DT and hall computer HC.

The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. A connector corresponding to each channel and a connector on the data counter DT side are connected by a cable. One signal is output to the outside from each connector (information terminal). Outer end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminals of the frame external terminal board 21 include, for example, the following signals (1) to (10).

(1) "Special symbol determination signal (information terminal 1)" output when the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 stops,
(2) "Variable short-time jackpot signal (information terminal 2)" output when the special symbol time-saving function described later is in operation during the jackpot game,
(3) "Variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" output when the special symbol time saving function is in operation,
(4) a "starter signal (information terminal 4)" output when the starter sensor 33a, 34a, 35a detects the passage of a game ball;
(5) A "jackpot in progress signal (information terminal 5)" output during operation of the below-described accessory continuous operation device;
(6) "Special symbol 1 determination signal (information terminal 6)" output when the variable display of special symbol 1 stops,
(7) "Special symbol 1 starter signal (information terminal 7)" output when the right starter sensor 33a or the middle starter sensor 34a detects a game ball;
(8) "Special symbol 2 starting opening signal (information terminal 8)" output when the lower right starting opening sensor 35a detects a game ball;
(9) When there is a winning prize, the number of prize balls is added, and 10 is subtracted from the total value every time the total value is 10 or more, and the "main prize ball signal (information terminal 9)" is output. )”,
(10) When clearing the RAM (output for 30000 ms after clearing the RAM), when executing the setting change processing described later (see Fig. 11), when detecting fraudulent magnetism by the magnetic sensor (output for 30000 ms after magnetic detection and cancellation), by the radio wave sensor "Security signal (information terminal 10 )” can be output.

Note that the main control unit 20 outputs the corresponding outer end signal from the information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) at the timing when the output timing of each signal arrives. Output after an interval of time (for example, 100 ms).

The hall computer HC monitors and collects the game information of the game machine based on the outer end signal output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame, and comprehensively manages the operation status of the game machines installed in the pachinko hall. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31A(3), the data counter DT related to the present invention will be described in detail. The data counter DT is a game information notification device for notifying specific game information regarding the connected game machine, and is usually installed above the game machine. The data counter DT is equipped with an informing means for informing predetermined game information based on the outer end signal from the external terminal board 21 for frame. This notification means is, for example, a light-emitting unit DTa containing a full-color LED, or display units DTb, DTc, DTd, DTe, etc., which are display devices such as a liquid crystal display device.

The illustrated data counter DT has the following reporting functions.
(A) "jackpot notification function (light emitting unit DTa)" for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot;
(B) "Big win accumulated count reporting function (big win count display unit DTd)" for reporting the total number of big wins (the number of big wins since the store opened);
(C) "Acquired number of balls reporting function (not shown)" for reporting the number of acquired balls during a big hit;
(D) "Start count notification function (start count display unit DTb) for notifying the number of symbol variation display games executed (the number of variations of special symbols) from the opening of the store or after the end of the jackpot (which may be a specific jackpot). ",
(E) "Total number of starts notification function (total number of rotations display unit DTc)" for notifying the total number of changes in special symbols from the time of opening,
(F) "History information reporting function (not shown)" for reporting the number of big hits information such as the day before and the day before (may be a specific number of big wins) and history information such as the number of big wins;
(G) "Number of consecutive villas reporting function (number of consecutive villas display part DTe)" for notifying the number of consecutive villas caused by this big hit (in this embodiment, the number of consecutive villas not including the first hit).
Reference DTg is a call button for calling a hall clerk. When the call button DTg is pressed, the light emitting unit DTa emits light in a light emission mode dedicated to calling. Reference DTh is a history information switching push button for displaying the history information.

The data counter DT described above is currently installed for each game machine in most pachinko halls. Such a data counter DT, for example, when it receives either the "big win signal" or the "variable short-time big win medium signal" output during the big win, notifies the occurrence of the big win, Update the number of times, etc. As a result, not only the player is notified of the occurrence of the big win, but also the surrounding players and hall clerks are informed that the game machine is in the process of the occurrence of the big win, so that the occurrence of the big win can be easily identified. .

The data counter DT generally displays necessary information on various display units according to the type of the outer end signal based on the switching (ON edge) from non-reception to reception of the outer end signal.

In addition, the main control unit 20 is compatible with the type test (examination related to the type of game machine based on the rules for authorization and type test of game machines) conducted by the Security Electronics and Communication Technology Association (Hotsukyo). Then, a model test signal specifying a game operation in real time can be output from the external terminal board 21 for frame. In addition, when installing a game machine that conforms to the model test in a pachinko hall, it is not permitted to change the conforming control program at all. Therefore, even after installation in the pachinko hall, the model test signal is repeatedly output processed (trial test signal terminal management processing during performance display monitor processing described later (step S823 in FIG. 28, see FIG. 29 showing the details). ).

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command related to payout (number of prize balls specified payout control command) can be transmitted.

The payout control board 29 is connected with a launch control board (launch control section) 28 for controlling the launcher 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for putting out game balls. The main roles of this payout control board 29 are to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, to control prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and to transmit status signals to the main control unit 20. is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a shortage of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. can receive each detection signal. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for putting out game balls. of control signals can be transmitted.

The payout control board 29 also includes a full detection sensor 60 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9) that detects when the upper tray 9 is full of game balls, A door open sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the open state of the front frame 2 and/or the front operation panel 7) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It's becoming This state signal includes a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a supply shortage indicating a shortage of game balls supplied from the game ball dispensing device 19. Signals, counting error signals indicating that the ball counting sensor 19b is inadequate in paying out prize balls or that an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, payout completion signals indicating that the payout operation has been completed, etc. are included, and various state signals can be transmitted. ing. Based on these state signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open (door open error), whether the game ball dispensing device 19 is properly dispensed (out of supply error), , the full state of the upper tray 9 (ball clogging error), etc. are monitored.

A firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a firing permission signal ES (a firing control signal) for permitting firing can be transmitted to the firing control board 28. FIG. The firing control board 28 controls energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the firing permission signal ES from the dispensing control board 29, and the firing operation handle 15 The shooting operation of the game ball is realized by the operation of . Specifically, when a discharge permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 detects that the player is touching the handle. The shooting operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the shooting stop switch (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the shooting permission signal ES is not output, even if the shooting operation handle 15 is operated, the shooting operation is not executed and the game ball is not shot. In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁When the payout control board 29 detects the ball jam error, it transmits a ball jam signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal ES to the firing control board 28, thereby canceling the full state of the upper tray 9. Control is performed to stop the launching operation until the

A setting key switch 94, a setting change switch 95, and a setting change completion switch 96 are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. A setting display 97 is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display.

When the power is turned on, the setting key switch 94 inserts a setting key possessed by a person involved in the hall and operates the ON/OFF operation to change the setting value. is a key switch for switching to . Also, the setting change switch 95 is a push-button type switch for changing the setting value. A setting change completion switch 96 is a setting confirmation switch used to confirm a changed setting value. These switches are provided at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine.

The setting display 97 displays information about setting values, and functions as setting display means. In the case of this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display and mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20 . In addition, the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, the relay board (relay board that relays the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: not shown) ), or an effect control unit (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine.

The above-mentioned "set value" is a value that changes the payout rate (so-called machine allocation (PAYOUT rate)) step by step. ing. This "set value" defines at least the lottery probability (winning probability) of the jackpot (hit type that will operate the condition device described later) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6), The higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability is set, which is advantageous to the player. For example, setting 1 is 1/410, setting 2 is 1/390, setting 3 is 1/370, setting 4 is 1/350, setting 5 is 1/330, setting 6 is 1/320. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the machine discount, which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the set value is a value that defines a machine split or the like, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event (for example, a big win).

By the way, the "set value" is determined by the hall clerk operating the setting change switch 95 solely based on the business strategy of the pachinko hall (game parlor) to determine the target set value. When a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of all or part of the jackpot types that trigger the operation of the condition device can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning all of jackpots 1 to 4, or the specific jackpots 1 to 3. Only the winning probability of is increased, and for jackpot 4, the winning probability may be common to all set values (the combined winning probability of jackpots 1 to 4 may be increased). Also, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(Regarding setting value change operation)
When the setting change switch 95 is turned on while the setting change operation is enabled, the current display value on the setting display 97 changes to "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→...・", so that it cycles through the range from 1 to 6. When the desired set value is reached, the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, and the current display value is determined as the set value. This set value information is stored in a predetermined area (set value storage area) of the RAM 203 . Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change operable state ends. Therefore, the main control unit 20 serves as setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of types of setting values based on the operation of predetermined operation means (setting key switch 94, setting change switch 95). Function.

Further, the main control section 20 is connected to a performance indicator 99, and the main control section 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display thereof.

(Regarding the game result information displayed on the performance indicator 99)
The performance display device 99 functions as information display means for displaying (announcing) information (hereinafter referred to as “performance information”) relating to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period), and includes a plurality of 7-segment displays (7 segment LED). The performance indicator 99 of the present embodiment has four 7-segment LEDs in which the display unit and the circuit unit are unitized, arranged side by side, for example, mounted on the main control board 20, and displays a 4-digit Configure possible indicators. Details will be described later, but the above “performance information” is information that pachinko halls and related government agencies want to check, and it A typical example is information on performance (predetermined information on game performance). Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location visible to the player, but installed at a location within the gaming machine that is easily visible. Specifically, the display unit of the performance indicator 99, which consists of four 7-segment LEDs, is placed in a place that is easy to see from the back of the game machine, that is, the main control unit ( Main control board) 20, payout control board 28, launch control board 29, the above relay board, production control section (production control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., or a board case that protects the control board Mounted on top, etc. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side so that a 4-digit number can be displayed, and each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP below the 7-segment number.

Specifically, the following information can be used as the performance information.
(1) The total number of payouts paid out due to winning during a specific state (total number of awarded balls during a specific state: α) is divided by the total number of out balls (number of out during a specific state: β) during that specific state. Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) can be employed as performance information. Such specific ratio information is useful as an index for evaluating the ball payout performance of the gaming machine.
(1-1) The above-mentioned "total number of payouts" refers to the number of winning openings (middle starting opening 34, right starting opening 33, lower right starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 40, 50). It is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out. In the case of this embodiment, there are 4 middle starting ports 34, 1 right starting port 33, 2 right starting ports 35, 15 upper big winning ports 40, 10 lower big winning ports 50, and general There are six winning openings 43 . The total number of out balls is the number of game balls driven into the game area 3a from the launcher 32 (the number of game balls detected by the OUT monitoring switch 49a).
(1-2) Which state to use as the "specific state" can be appropriately determined according to the performance information desired to be acquired. In the present embodiment, any state can be adopted from among the normal state, latent state, time saving state, variable probability state, big hit game, small hit game, etc. (details about each game state will be described later. do). Moreover, instead of measuring only one state, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, a plurality of types of states such as normal state and latent state, normal state and small winning game, all game states except during winning game can be appropriately selected as measurement targets.
(1-3) In addition, as the period during the specific state, instead of focusing on each game state such as the normal state and the winning game, a period focusing on the probability of a big win lottery may be measured. For example, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be measured. In addition, the winning game by the big hit (during the big winning game) is controlled to a low probability state, and the game state at the time of winning continues during the winning game by the small win (small winning game). Continued. For this reason, when it is desired to measure the period of the pure low probability state, the period excluding the period during the jackpot game should be the measurement object. Also, if you want to measure the period of the low probability state or the high probability state excluding the winning game of both the big win and the small win, the period excluding the winning game should be the measurement object. In addition, the details of the big hit type, the small hit type, the operation mode of these winning games, etc. will be described later.
(1-4) Also, as the "total number of payouts", the total number of payouts excluding one or a plurality of specific winning openings may be set as the total number of payouts (total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, those excluding the big winning openings 40 and 50 from the measurement target (in this case, the total number of payouts is the total number of payouts that are substantially excluded from the measurement target during the winning) as the total number of payouts. good too.

(2) In addition, only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding specific winning holes, or the total number of out-balls may be measured, and the measurement results may be used as the performance information.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (normal number of balls paid out) and the total number of out balls during the normal state (normal number of out balls) are measured in real time. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 (normal payout count / normal out count x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “base value”) (display value is display the value rounded to the first place). Therefore, the data of the normal payout quantity, the normal out quantity, and the base value are respectively stored (stored) in the corresponding areas of the RAM 203 (normal payout quantity storage region, normal out quantity storage region, specific ratio information storage region). It is designed to be However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60000), once the measurement is finished, The base value is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of this embodiment, the "specified number" that triggers the end of the above measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the total number of outs during all game states (including during winning games) (hereinafter "the number of out balls in all states"). ) is adopted. This all-state-out number is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (all-state-out number storage area) of the RAM 203 . Hereinafter, the above-mentioned (normal payout number storage area, normal out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area, all state out number storage area) will be collectively referred to as "measurement information storage area" unless otherwise required.

Then, after storing the base value of this time as history information, clear the measurement information storage area used in this measurement, and the next normal payout number, normal out number, base value and all state out ball number Start measurement. As a result, next performance information is measured and stored in real time.

On the performance indicator 99, the previous base value as history information and the base value currently being measured in real time are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals (they can be displayed simultaneously. may be used). In the case of this embodiment, the two 7-segment LEDs on the front left half of the four 7-segment LEDs are set to the base value (real-time base value: first base value) being measured in real time or the previous base value. (history base value: second base value) as an 'identification display unit (identification segment)' that displays identification information that can be identified, and the two 7-segment LEDs on the right half of the front display the base value' Base display unit (ratio segment)'. When the real-time base value is displayed on the base display section, for example, "bL." is displayed on the identification display section. "b6." is displayed (identification display). The base value is rounded off to the first decimal place and displayed on the numeric display. If the value after rounding is three digits or more, "99." is displayed on the base display to indicate overflow. The history base value is not limited to the previous base value. can be determined as appropriate. Regarding the performance indicator 99, if it is possible to display at least the real-time base value and the previous history base value, the display mode of the display of the base value and the switching display mode are also determined. It is free to use a periodic switching display form or any other display form.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information about the special symbol variation display game and information about errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent cheating, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the performance control unit 24, and is configured for one-way communication in which signals from the performance control unit 24 cannot be received. .

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor that incorporates a CPU 241 (production control CPU), and includes a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 that functions as a work area and buffer memory. It is composed mainly of a microcomputer equipped with a performance control RAM), and is also equipped with a sound control unit (sound source LSI), RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. and controls the entire production operation.

The main role of this effect control unit 24 is to receive the effect control command from the main control unit 20, select and decide the effect based on the effect control command, control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36 which is the effect means, and the sound of the speaker 46 control, light emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (the button LED 13b and other performance LEDs (not shown)), operation control of the movable accessories 80 and 90, and the like.

The effect control section 24 includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 . This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing, and a VDP expansion. A VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the image data obtained, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program describing the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory.

In addition, the production control unit 24 has a light display including a decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) and various LEDs for production in order to produce various productions (light production, sound production, and movable body production by movable body accessories). A light display control unit for the device 45a, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and a drive control unit (motor drive circuit), etc. The production control section 24 can transmit a control signal regarding the production means to these control sections.

A position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the motion of the movable body role is connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 detects the current motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. Its operation is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Also, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the malfunction of the action of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, it is reported as an error.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected with the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the direction key 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and direction keys 75 .

Based on the performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely among a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance, and performs various performance means at necessary timing. Control to bring out the desired effect. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern fluctuation display operation, A "drawing scenario" in a broad sense is realized by the time-series development of advance notice effects, etc.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, the CPU 201 (main control CPU), when there is a command to be transmitted, sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting, the first time strobe signal. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive commands.

Also, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It's becoming Further, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing interrupt processing (periodically executed timer interrupt processing) based on another interrupt. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the processing concerned, and the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special Symbol Variation Display Game, Decorative Symbol Variation Display Game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the middle start port 34, the right start port 33, or the lower right start port 35. , the main control unit 20 performs a "big win lottery" by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game, and displays the result in the special symbol after a predetermined time elapses. Derivation display is performed on the device, and the special symbol variation display game is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big win lottery based on the winning at the middle starting port 34 or the right starting port 33 and the big winning lottery based on winning at the lower right starting port 35 are performed independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery results regarding the middle start port 34 and the right start port 33 are derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery results regarding the lower right start port 35 are derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. . Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the middle starting port 34 or the right starting port 33, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variable display is performed. Game is started. On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower right starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variability display game is started. It's becoming Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, when the big win lottery result is "hit (big win, small win)". is a predetermined "hit" mode, and in other cases, a predetermined "losing" mode, the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed, thereby deriving and displaying the game result (big hit lottery result). It's becoming

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a will be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second game on the side of the special symbol display device 38b will be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". This special symbol variation display game is called "special symbol variation display game 2". In addition, unless particularly necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (abbreviated as "special symbol" in some cases), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol "symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

Further, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (dramatic game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Then various productions are developed. When the special pattern variation display game ends, the decoration pattern variation display game also ends, the special pattern display device reflects the predetermined special pattern indicating the big win lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the big win lottery result. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a "big win" (when the big win lottery result is a "big win"), the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". ” in each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” display areas, the three decorative patterns are “7”, “7”, “ 7” display state).

When the "big hit" is achieved, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "big win" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the upper grand prize winning opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 3) provided in the first special variable prize winning device 42 operates to open and close the open door 42b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the upper special winning prize opening 40. Or, the lower big prize winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the second special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby the lower big winning prize opening 50 is opened and closed, and a special game state (jackpot game) more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the jackpot has passed a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 28.5 seconds), or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot (winning balls to the jackpot) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winning prizes: the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for the winning openings that are opened or enlarged by one operation of the accessory: for example, 15 (upper large winning opening 40) , 10 (Lower Grand Prize Opening 50)), the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions are met, the big winning opening is closed. A predetermined prescribed number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds at maximum) are repeated.

When the big winning game is started, an opening performance for notifying the start of the big winning is first performed, and after the opening performance is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after completion of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to inform that the big win is over, and thus the big win game is ended. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening effect period, a round game execution period with the maximum number of rounds as the upper limit, and an ending effect period.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 detects that a game ball has entered (won) the right starting port 33, the middle starting port 34, or the lower right starting port 35. Specifically, on the condition that the game ball is detected by these starting opening sensors 33a, 34a, or 35a and the starting condition (starting condition related to special symbols) is established, "big hit", "small hit", Or 'winning lottery (lottery by type)' that draws whether it is "losing", and if it is a "big hit", the type of the big hit, if it is a "small hit", the type of the small hit , If it is a "losing", a big hit lottery including a 'symbol lottery (winning type (winning type) lottery)' that draws the type of losing Since there is no need to perform a type lottery, the lottery may be omitted), based on the lottery result information, the special pattern that is finally stopped and displayed according to the variation pattern of the special pattern and the winning type (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as "special stop symbol"). Then, as an effect control command specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern specification command" including at least special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information about the big hit lottery result and special symbol variation time) is sent to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control section 24 . In addition, in this embodiment, in order to increase the variety of effects, a "decorative design designation command" including special stop design information (symbol lottery result information (information on winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It's like

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "ready-to-win effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect", which will be described later) will occur. More specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are broadly classified into a "hit variation pattern" in the case of winning and a "loss variation pattern" in the case of loss, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, 'reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach production, 'normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of reach production, 'pseudo-continuation reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-continuation production and reach production, pseudo Multiple types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as 'normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuation', which specifies the occurrence of continuous effects and does not specify the occurrence of reach effects. It should be noted that, basically, the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous variation pattern are set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern in order to secure the performance time of the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect.

Effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, variation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, chronologically during the decorative design variation display game Decide the content of the production to be developed (production scenario such as advance notice production) and the decorative pattern to be finally displayed stopped (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern by fluctuating according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern. A pattern variation display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. has substantially the same time width as the period of Also, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect), sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting and flashing drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45 and LED are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control unit 20 performs an "auxiliary winning lottery" based on a random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variation display game, and after a certain period of time has passed, the result is changed to a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is set to a specific lighting state (for example, two LEDs 39 are all lit, or "○" and " The LED on the side of "○" among the LEDs expressing "x" is in a lighting state), and the display is stopped.

When this "assist hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates and the movable piece 47 opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening the right starting port 33. As a result, a state (starting opening open state) in which game balls are likely to flow in is generated, and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (normal state) occurs. In this general electric open game, by the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41, until the opening time of the right starting port 33 elapses for a predetermined time, or the number of game balls winning the right starting port 33 is a predetermined number (for example, 4) is reached, the winning area is opened, and the right starting port 33 is closed when any one of these conditions is met. The condition for closing the right starting port 33 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the right starting port 33, or may be based only on the number of game balls winning the right starting port 33. It can be.

Here, in this embodiment, during the special/decorative pattern variation display game, during the normal pattern variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the general electric open game, each start port 33 to 35 or the normal pattern start port 37 is won. occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the starting opening sensors 33a to 35a or the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is established, the fluctuation display game is started. As the data related to the right, excluding the data related to the variable display, the data is retained and stored up to the maximum number of retained memories (for example, 4) which is the predetermined upper limit. A game ball related to the pending data or the pending data that is not used for the symbol variation display operation is also called an "operating pending ball". In order to make clear to the player the number of activated balls held, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place on the gaming machine 1, or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. light up the device.

Also, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203, respectively, and reserved as the number of determinations of special design or normal design. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Also, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

(Simultaneous fluctuation type: Fig. 7 (b))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a and the variable display operation of the special symbol 2 in the special symbol display device 38b can be performed independently. It's becoming In other words, it is a configuration of a pachinko game machine called a so-called "simultaneous variation type" in which the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the variation display of the special symbol 2 can be executed in parallel. In the case of this simultaneous variation type, both special symbols can be displayed in parallel. There may be a case where the game ends and stops at a winning pattern (a pattern indicating a big hit (big hit pattern) or a pattern indicating a small hit (small hit pattern)). However, since the winning game is executed for either one of the special symbols 1 and 2, the winning game for both the special symbols 1 and 2 cannot be executed. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a method not to stop and display both the special symbols 1 and 2 as jackpot symbols at the same time (during confirmation display, winning game, etc.).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), for example, when the variable display of special symbols 1 and 2 is executed in parallel, the variable time of one special symbol ends and the other special symbol is preceded. In the case of stop-displaying with a winning pattern, the fluctuation time is forcibly terminated even if the other special pattern is being variably displayed, and is stopped at a pattern indicating a loss (a loss pattern) (forced loss stop control). Also, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed as a hit symbol first, the variation display is continued (not stopped) while the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the one special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the measurement is restarted after the winning game related to the winning symbol ends, it is not necessary to forcibly stop at the losing symbol (measurement interruption control). However, in the case where one of the special symbols is first stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, there is no problem even if the other special symbol is stopped as a win symbol after that, so the fluctuation is continued as it is. In this embodiment, a simultaneous variation type of "forced loss at the time of the big hit and measurement interruption type at the time of the small hit" is adopted in which the measurement is interrupted in the case of a small hit and the forced loss is stopped in the case of a big hit.

(3-2. Game state)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of game states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various game states will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" for which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as the functional unit. There are two types of probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and normal symbol probability variation function (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special pattern probability variation function varies the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/137), which is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is a function that generates a "high probability state". In addition, the normal pattern probability variation function varies the auxiliary winning lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/200) to a high probability (for example, 199/200), which is a predetermined probability (normal probability), from the normal game state. It is also a function that generates an advantageous "probability change state for assistance".

In addition, the main control unit 20 is provided with a "fluctuation time reduction function (time reduction function)" for which the functional unit is responsible. There are two types of this, a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special symbol time-saving function generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that reduces the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is stopped). It is a function that allows Under the game state in which the special symbol time saving function is in operation (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened, and the jackpot per unit time is greater than in the normal game state. The number of lotteries is improved in which the number of lotteries is increased. In addition, the normal pattern time saving function shortens the average time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal pattern starts to change until it is stopped). is a function that generates Under the game state in which the normal pattern time saving function is in operation (normal pattern time saving state), the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern in one normal pattern fluctuation display game is shortened, and the subsidy per unit time is higher than that in the normal game state. A winning lottery number of times is improved, and the number of lotteries is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of operation pending balls, but in this case, the time saving function is not operating, This is due to other control processing.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" for which the main control section 20 serves as the functional section. The open extension function is a function to generate an "extended open state" in which the opening operation period of the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (at least one of the opening time of the movable piece 47 and the number of times it is opened) is extended. This open extension state is called a so-called "electric tube support state". Under the game state (open extension state) in which the opening extension function is in operation, the opening operation period of the movable piece 47 (starting opening open state time) is extended from 0.1 seconds to 3.7 seconds, for example, and the The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from 1 time (when the extension extension function is not in operation) to 3 times (when the extension extension function is in operation), and the operation of the movable piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. It will be in the operation rate improvement state where the rate is improved.

By activating one or more of the above functions, the internal game state (internal game state) of the gaming machine can be changed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the game state in which the special symbol probability variable function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability variable function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function operate is called "probable variable state", and from among these functions A game state in which the special symbol probability variation function is removed is called a "time saving state", and a game state in which at least the special symbol probability variation function is activated and the opening extension function is not activated is called a "latent probability state (latent probability)". A state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal game state (normal state)". Therefore, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability in these game states, when the game state is the "time-saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability is 'low probability', and the game state is the 'potential state'. Or in the case of "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes 'high probability'.

In this embodiment, the special symbol time saving function operates in the case of the variable probability state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state. During the latent definite state, the special symbol time saving function related to the special figure 2 is activated, and the special figure 2 is made into the special symbol time saving state.

In addition, under the electric chew support state (hereinafter referred to as "state with electric support"), the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, and the right start port 33 Since the winning rate increases and the frequency of winning prizes per unit time rises, the game state becomes more advantageous to the player than in the case of no electric chew support state (hereinafter referred to as "no electric support state"). When focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the game state is "normal game state" or "latency state", it becomes 'no electric support state', and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability variable state" If it is, it will be 'state with electric support'. A game state that focuses on the operation status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the above jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of an electric sapo state. is called "internal game state". Regarding the operation status of each function, the main control unit 20 side manages whether the function is activated or not by the ON/OFF state of the flag corresponding to each function. (YJ = normal “00H”, time saving “01H”, latent probability “02H”, probability variable “03H”, etc.)” is used for management.

During the jackpot, a jackpot game (jackpot game) in which the jackpot opens and closes occurs, but all of the above functions are inactive, and basically the game state is the same as the normal state. placed in However, during the hit game (small hit game) by the small hit, it is different from the above-mentioned big hit game. During the small winning game, the big winning opening is opened and closed in the same way as during the big winning game, but when the small winning is won, the transition of the internal game state itself is not performed. That is, during the small-hit game, the game state at the time of winning the small-hit is continued. For example, if a small win is won during the time-saving state, it is placed under the time-saving state during the small win, and if a small win is won during the latent definite state, it is placed under the latent definite state during the small winning game. .

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About winning types and winning games)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of hits to be drawn in the special symbol variation display game, that is, the types of hits to be selected for the jackpot lottery are "jackets 1 to 8" belonging to the jackpot types, and the small hit types. There are provided a plurality of types of hits such as "small hits" belonging to. Notations such as "16R" and "8R" in the drawing indicate the prescribed number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). A plurality of types of losses (losses A, B, and C) are provided as types of "losses" that are neither big hits nor small wins (see FIG. 35). Also, although there is one type of small hit, a plurality of types may be provided.

The big hit type is a hit that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and the "minor hit" is a hit that belongs to the "non-jackpot" type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball It is activated when passes through a specific area in the grand prize opening (excluding those that win the grand prize opening while the accessory continuous operation device is in operation). Also, the "accessory continuous operating device" refers to a device that can continuously operate the special electric accessory. In addition, "special electric accessory" refers to an electric accessory that opens or expands the entrance of the big prize opening. Therefore, in the case of a small win, the round game itself is not executed, and a large prize is won in an operation mode (pseudo-round game) that is the same as or very similar to the round game by the big win, or in an operation mode that is completely different from the round game by the big win. Opening and closing movements of the mouth are controlled. Both the hits belonging to the big win type and the hits belonging to the small win type are hits that trigger a transition to a special game state (triggering the occurrence of a winning game) accompanied by the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening. , It is different from mere "losing".

As shown in FIG. 4, the jackpots 1 to 4 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 1 side, and the jackpots 5 to 8 and the small hits are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 2 side. , Only on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side), it is possible to win a small hit.

In addition, for the big wins 1 to 8, the game state after the big win game ends is determined according to the game state at the time of winning. For example, the jackpot 1 is shifted to the "probability state (high probability, no power supply)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and the jackpot 2 is the game state at the time of winning that is the normal state. In the case, it is shifted to “probability variable state (high probability, with electric sapo)”, and in the case of latent probability, time saving, probability variable state, it is shifted to “latent probability state”. In addition, jackpots 4 and 8 are jackpots that trigger a shift to a time-saving state (low probability, with electric sapo), and when the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, "time-saving state A (time-saving number of times 50 times) ”, and in the case of the latent probability/time saving/probability variable state, the state is transferred to “time saving state B (time saving number of times 7 times)”. Other big hits 3, 6 to 7 are as shown in FIG.

In addition, jackpots 1 to 8 are the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in one round game, and the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening can be expected to reach the maximum number of winnings (9) "Long open time" (for example, 29.8 seconds)” is a “long open jackpot”. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, the profit state during the jackpot game increases as the maximum number of rounds is relatively large. In addition, due to the ball output rate, some of the jackpots include a “short opening jackpot” in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is “short opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds)”. may be provided. In this short opening big win, since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is very short, it can be a big win in which winning is hardly expected (it may be impossible to win). In addition, the maximum number of rounds for any jackpot can be appropriately determined.

Regarding the "latent probability state", "probability variable state", and "time saving state" according to the present embodiment, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variations) is a predetermined specified number of times (special symbol variation display game 1 and 2 (the total number of executions of special symbols 1 and 2) are completed, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big win (excluding a small win) within the prescribed number of times, From the next game, the normal state (normal game state) is entered. In the case of this embodiment, the latent certainty state or the probability variable state is set to a predetermined prescribed number of times (ST prescribed number of times) (cutting type (ST machine type)), and the time saving state is 7 times (in the case of time saving state A) or 50 times (in the case of time saving state B) is set. In addition, for the latent probability state or the probability variable state, instead of determining the ST specified number of times, it may be a "general probability variable type" that continues the high probability state until the next big hit is elected. Also, the time saving state can be set to an appropriate number of times (for example, 100 times). Also, the transition to the latent definite state or the definite variable state may be conditioned on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area in the large winning opening (V definite variable machine type).

(Regarding hit games by small hits)
In a small winning game (hereinafter referred to as a "small winning game"), the lower big winning opening 50 is opened once or multiple times (once in this embodiment). Here, the "small hit" is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the "condition device" as described above, so a round game like the "big hit" is not executed. In other words, the opening and closing operation of the lower big winning opening 50 during the small winning game is a pseudo round game. Here, regarding the opening time of the lower grand prize-winning port 50, if the lower grand prize-winning port 50 is opened once due to legal requirements, the opening time may be repeated multiple times. , the total opening time shall not exceed 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, the opening time of the lower special prize opening 50 is set to 1.2 seconds. This open time is determined as an open time in which one to several game balls can win, taking into consideration the arrangement pattern (not shown) of the game nails, the flow path correction plates 37d and 40d, and the like. Regarding the closing condition of the lower big winning hole 50 in the small winning game, the maximum winning number (for example, , 9) is satisfied. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the lower special prize opening 50 does not reach the maximum number of prizes within the maximum opening/closing operation time (within 1.2 seconds). After the maximum opening/closing operation time of 1.2 seconds of the opening 50 has elapsed, specifically, after a series of opening/closing operations of the big winning opening are executed, the small winning game is ended.

Further, after the small winning game is played, the internal game state at the time of winning the small winning is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal game state caused by the winning of the small winning is not performed. Therefore, the internal game state at the time of winning the small win and the internal game state after the small win game are both the same internal game state. In this respect, it is different in nature from the "jackpot" in which transition control of the internal game state can be performed.

Incidentally, the small hit may be of one type or of a plurality of types. When providing a plurality of types of small hits, it is preferable that the modes of the small win games are different. For example, when at least a first small win and a second small win are provided, the first small win is a small win game with the opening time of the big winning opening of 1.0 seconds, and the second small win is the first small win. A small winning game with opening time of 0.5 seconds for the big winning opening, which is shorter than winning, can be executed. In this way, by providing a plurality of small wins for executing small winning games with different opening times of the big winning openings, it is possible to add inflection and slowness to the speed of increasing the number of balls in the small winning rush described later, which makes the game more interesting. can be improved. In addition, when providing a plurality of types of small hits, their winning probabilities can be appropriately determined. If it is a game property that gives a feeling of increasing ball output speed, a small win type with a relatively long opening time of the big winning hole is set to a high probability (in the above example, the first small win is higher than the second small win). high probability), and if it is a game that slows down the speed of the increase in balls, set the small win type with a relatively short opening time of the big winning hole to a high probability (in the above example, the first small win is set at a lower probability than the second small hit). Also, the type of jackpot can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that produce effects related to the game state, and is configured to be capable of transition control between the respective effect modes in response to the transition of the game state. ing. The production mode includes "normal production mode" corresponding to "normal state", "potential production mode (small hit rush production mode)" corresponding to "potential state", and "probable variable production" corresponding to "probable variable state". A plurality of types of production modes are provided according to each game state, such as "mode" and "time saving production mode" corresponding to "time saving state".

The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (production state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of production modes. The effect control unit 24 designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current game state, or designates that the game state is to be shifted. Based on the performance control command, it is configured to be able to perform transition control between a plurality of types of performance modes while maintaining consistency with the game state on the side of the main control unit 20. - 特許庁The specific effect control commands include a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, a demonstration display command 1, a demonstration display command 2, a predetermined command sent during a win (a jackpot start command specifying the start of a jackpot, and a jackpot end command). There is a jackpot end command that specifies ). The effect control unit 24 also has a functional unit (effect state management means) that manages the effect mode related to the game state. The production control unit 24 (production state management means) manages the current production mode in a form that maintains consistency with the main control unit 20 side.

(5-2. Production under each production mode)
In addition, in each production mode, the background as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns is provided in each production mode so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying under in the production mode corresponding to the game state. The display is controlled to switch to different background effects. In addition to changing the background production according to each production mode, each production mode can be changed by using different decorative patterns corresponding to each production mode, or by changing sound production, light production, etc. You can also suggest.

(5-3. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, Various related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result It is configured to be able to control the appearance of such a "notice effect". Such a notice effect suggests (announcement) the degree of expectation (expectation degree of winning) as to whether or not the win type is won, and acts as a "promotion effect" for arousing the player's expectation of winning. Typical advance notice effects include "read-ahead notice effects" and player-participation effects, in addition to "reach effects" and "pseudo continuous effects". The effect control unit 24 has a notice effect control means capable of controlling execution (appearance) of these effects.

The term “ready-to-win effect” refers to an effect mode involving a ready-to-reach state, specifically, to an effect mode in which the game result is derived and displayed via the ready-to-reach state. There are multiple types of reach effects associated with winning expectations, for example, reach effects with relatively low winning expectations such as N reach (normal reach) and relatively higher winning expectations than N reach. A reach effect (SP reach effect) is included. Many of "SP reach" have relatively longer performance time (fluctuation time) than N reach, in order to arouse the player's expectation of winning. The SP reach includes, for example, a normal SP reach that develops from N reach to SP reach, an advanced SP reach that develops from N reach to SP reach, and further develops to another SP reach, and the like.

In this embodiment, N reach includes multiple types of N reach such as "N reach 1 to 2", and SP reach includes multiple types of "SP reach A to C, weak SP reach, strong SP reach". A variety of SP reach is provided. In addition, regarding the relationship of winning expectations, the relationships of "N reach 1<N reach 2" and "SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C" are provided. N reach and SP reach include various reach depending on the game state (see FIGS. 34 to 36 described later).

"Pseudo continuous effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous change display state (pseudo change) of decorative symbols. This "pseudo-fluctuation" means that during the decorative pattern fluctuation display game, some or all of the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (including reach state and non-reach state), and the decorative patterns are changed again from the temporary stop state. A variable display mode in which a display operation such as executing a display operation is repeated once or multiple times. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "pre-reading forewarning effect (continuous forewarning effect)" that is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Such a "pseudo-run" basically has its occurrence rate determined so that the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning. Expectations for occurrence of reach C (high-expectation SP reach) are increasing.

In addition, the "pre-reading notice effect" mainly refers to the pending display mode and the This is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning regarding the operation pending ball can be notified in advance by using the background effect of the symbol variation display game to be executed first. In addition, in the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "ready-to-win effect", various effects such as the so-called "character notice effect" and "step-up notice effect" are generated to excite the game contents.

Here, screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment, including the pre-reading preview effect, will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display effect or advance notice effect is displayed). display area) is provided, and in the lower display area in the screen, a reservation display area 76 (reservation display portions a1 to d1) that displays the number of operation reservation balls on the special symbol 1 side and a special symbol A reservation display area 77 (reservation display portions a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation reservation balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation pending ball, that effect is notified by a predetermined pending display mode. In the illustration, the presence or absence of the operation suspension ball is lit (with operation suspension ball: "○ (white circle)" in the illustration) or in the off state (no operation suspension ball: dashed circle in the illustration), and the current operation suspension An example in which information about the number of balls is reported is shown.

The display (suspension display) regarding the presence or absence of the operation reserve ball is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (the order of winning). It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) active holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest pending a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the pending display areas 76, 77 is the game running pending K As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the striker J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation pending ball occurs, from the main control unit 20, the pre-reading judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation holding balls at the time of the pre-reading judgment (the number of the existing operation holding balls including the operation holding ball that occurred this time) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S361 in FIG. 17). The pending addition command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte side data (prize command 2 (MODE)) that can specify the number of operation pending balls at the time of prefetching judgment, and the lower byte that can specify prefetching judgment information. side data (winning command 2 (EVENT)) (see FIG. 17).

When the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command, based on the prefetch determination information included therein, effect control processing relating to "prefetching advance notice effect" is performed as part of the display control process related to the above pending display. Specifically, based on the information contained in the pending addition command, a pre-reading notice lottery is performed to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed. special hold display mode, etc.). The probability of winning by the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher for "big hit" than "losing", and for reach types with relatively high winning expectations, and pre-reading notice effects occur. Depending on whether or not, the degree of expectation of winning a big win or a specific win type is indicated.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is specifically related to the big-hit lottery result (big-hit lottery result at the start of variation) executed when the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. and information about the prefetching variation pattern obtained when prefetching the variation pattern at the start of the variation, that is, this prefetching determination information includes at least the prefetching determination result of the winning lottery result at the start of the variation (prefetching winning result) Information is included, and in addition, it is possible to include pre-reading determination result (pre-reading pattern result) information of the pattern lottery result and pre-reading determination result (pre-reading fluctuation pattern) information of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified by the pre-reading notice. It should be noted that the "forecast fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation reserve ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation reserve ball is used for the variable display operation. . For example, if the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "pseudo N (N = 2, 3) + SP reach A", the content specified by the prefetch fluctuation pattern is "pseudo N + SP reach A ”, it may be specified that it is “SP reach A type”, which is the gist of the reach effect.

In the case of this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon targeted for the pre-reading notice is, for example, a normal holding display. Pre-reading of "suspension display change system" such as changing from white (normal suspension display mode) to special suspension color such as blue, green, red, rainbow color of advance notice display or color suspension display (special suspension display mode) An advance notice will be given. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation holding ball of the hatched holding display portion b1 has changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors of the pending icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. It is a premium pending icon (notice of this reserved hold) that will be displayed. Therefore, this suspension display portion works as a suspension display means for displaying the number of suspension operations. However, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed, the holding display mode of the corresponding one of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (special reservation display mode). This works as a means for generating a look-ahead foretelling effect. The existing operation pending balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game as a trigger. At this time, in order to express that one operation reserve ball has been digested, the display position of the reservation display part corresponding to the existing operation reserve ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Control (shift display) is performed, but the above-described unusual pending display mode continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the pending display.

Next, the player participation type production will be described. The player-participation type production is a production mode belonging to the so-called "button announcement production", in which the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing, long pressing, continuous hitting, etc.) on the production button 13 (operation means). This is a foretelling effect mode in which the content of the effect can change based on. In the player-participation type effect, an operation instruction effect for instructing a predetermined operation to the effect button 13 appears during a predetermined button effective period, and when the effect button 13 is operated during the button effective period, The currently appearing production mode changes to another production mode (operation-time production) (for example, the character display changes, special sound effects and light effects occur, etc.), and the production mode before and after the operation (production content) In accordance with the above, it is a notice effect mode for notifying the degree of expectation for winning.

(Regarding front fluctuation and reverse fluctuation: Fig. 7 (b))
Since the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is of the simultaneous variation type, the decorative symbol variation display games corresponding to the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, respectively. Simultaneously displaying effects related to the variable display game is troublesome for the player, and causes confusion as to which symbol variable display game effect should be focused on. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the special symbols 1 and 2 are simultaneously changing (both the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are being executed), according to the game state, the symbol related to one of the special symbols The effect of the variable display game is preferentially displayed. For example, in the normal state, the game is advanced with the aim of winning a prize in the middle start port 34, so the symbol variation display game 1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 side becomes dominant, while in the latent state. In the latent state, the game is advanced with the aim of winning at the lower right starting port 35, so the symbol variation display game 2 corresponding to the special symbol 2 side becomes dominant. Considering this point, if it is one of the normal state, the variable probability state, and the time saving state, the effect is currently the decorative symbol variation display game 1 as the main effect (the effect on the side of the table variation display state (table variation state)). If it is in the latent definite state, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 is made to appear as the main effect (see the corresponding relationship in FIG. 7(b)). For example, in the normal state, since the special symbol 1 is in the table variation state, the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the variable display operation of the decorative symbols related to the variable decorative symbol display game 1, the advance notice effect, and the like. Therefore, if the current gaming state is any of the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state, the main effect will be for the symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1 table variation state), and in principle, the symbol variation. The advance notice effect (reach effect, etc.) for the display game 2, the pending icon, and the decoration pattern are not displayed (special figure 2 back fluctuation state). If the current game state is the latent state, the main effect will be for the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 table variation state), and the advance notice effect for the symbol variation display game 1 (reach effect, etc.) ), pending icons and decorative patterns are not displayed (special figure 1 back fluctuation state). However, in the case of this embodiment, it is not the case that the reverse side fluctuation display state (back side fluctuation state) side effect is not displayed at all. For example, a sub effect ( As a sub effect), a dedicated display area 160 is provided for the number of pending special symbols 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of variable display (see reference numeral 160 in FIGS. 31A to 31G, for example). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the front fluctuation state may be abbreviated as "front fluctuation" and the back fluctuation state as "back fluctuation".

It should be noted that the effect control unit 24, when it is assumed that the player is left-handed under the "right-handed advantage" game state (during winning game, latent probability state, time saving state, variable probability state), for example, When there is a prize in the middle start port 34, a ``right-handed warning notification effect'' is displayed to warn the player that he will hit the right, and the player moves to the right under the ``left-handed advantage'' game state (normal state). When it is assumed that you are hitting, for example, if there is a winning at the combination gate 57, the normal symbol start port 37, the right start port 33, or the lower right start port 35, the player is instructed to hit left. A warning notification control means is provided for producing a warning "left-handed warning notification effect".

(5-4. Production means)
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by means of effects provided in the game machine. Such directing means may be stimulus transmission means capable of exhibiting directing effects by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations, and light generating means (light directing means) such as decorative lamps 45 and LED devices. ), a sound generating device (sound effect means) such as a speaker 46, an effect display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device for transmitting contact pressure to the body of the player, and applying wind pressure to the body of the player. A typical example is a wind pressure device, or a movable body accessory that exhibits a visual presentation effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces effects by displaying images, and devices that produce effects by means other than images, such as 7-segment displays, are included in the concept of the above-mentioned production display device.

<6. Game state transition: Fig. 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, transition of the game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the "normal state", the "potential state", the "time-saving state", and the "variable probability state".

As already explained, "normal state" and "latency state" are 'no electric sapo' states in which the electric chew support function is not given, but the auxiliary hit probability is not zero, and the ball enters the normal symbol start port 37 Then, if it becomes an auxiliary hit, a general electric open game in which the movable piece 47 (electric chew) of the normal variable prize winning device 41 operates is generated. However, the assist winning lottery probability is placed under a low probability state (1/200), and the operation time (opening time) of the movable piece 47 is very short (opening once in 0.1 seconds), and the right starting port 33 It will be very difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, "time saving state" and "variable state" are 'with electric sapo' state where the electric chew support function is given, so the lottery probability per assistance is placed under the high probability state (199/200), and The opening time of the movable piece 47 is long (three openings of 1.2 seconds + two openings of 0.5 seconds), making it easier to enter the right starting port 33 . In the case of this embodiment, the normal pattern variation time is 1000 ms during the normal state and the latent probability state, and 1004 ms during the probability variation state and the time saving state, which are substantially the same time, and the variation pattern is also one type. . Of course, depending on the presence or absence of the electric sapo, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern may be the same, or may be different. Further, a plurality of types of variation patterns of normal symbols having different variation times may be provided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the manner in which the player should hit to obtain an advantageous situation changes according to the game state. Specifically, if it is a normal state, it is advantageous to aim at "left hitting" so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b, and if it is a variable state, a latent state, or a time saving state, the game "Right-handed", in which the ball is aimed to pass through the right-flow path 3c, is advantageous. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, the features of each game state will be explained.

(Regarding normal state)
During the above-mentioned "normal state", "left-handed" is advantageous, and therefore the player progresses the game while aiming at the left flow path 3b. That is, the game is progressed while receiving a big hit lottery (special symbol variation display game 1) on the side of the special symbol 1, aiming at winning the middle starting port 34.例文帳に追加

By the way, in the case of this embodiment, there is no small hit in the lottery target type on the special figure 1 side, and there is a small hit in the lottery target type on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 4). The odds of winning a small hit are also very high, about 1/1.14 (see FIG. 4). Therefore, there is a risk that a strategy shot will be made to try to obtain a small winning ball by hitting "right" during the normal state and aiming for a small winning game. However, in the normal state, the variation time of the special symbol 1 is 112 seconds at the longest (refer to the variation pattern type column 'RUSH direct hit reach' in FIG. 34), but the variation time of the special symbol 2 is , 600 seconds (at the time of loss, small hit), which has a very long variation time, "super long variation pattern" is selected (variation pattern type column in FIG. 1-6′). Therefore, even if you hit "right" during the normal state and win the lower right starting port 35 on the special figure 2 side, this super long fluctuation pattern (10 minute fluctuation 1 to 6 ) is selected, the waiting time until the start of the small winning game becomes very long. Also, when a small hit is won, immediately after the player confirms the stop display (stop special symbol) of the special figure 2, or immediately after confirming the opening operation of the lower big winning opening 50, even if the player starts hitting to the right. Even if the lower special winning opening 50 is aimed at and hit, the lower special winning opening 50 is already closed when the game ball reaches the open door 52b, and unless the player continues to hit to the right. , and lower prize winning openings 50 cannot be expected. In addition, in the lottery target type on the special figure 2 side in the normal state, there is no big hit (small hit rush fixed big hit) type that triggers the transition to the "potential state" in which the "small hit rush" described later occurs. Therefore, the act of "shooting to the right" during the normal state causes an extremely large loss of time in obtaining a profit, and there is a high possibility of inadvertently causing the loss of the game ball. It is designed to be a serious act, and the capture attack is practically invalidated.

(About latent state: Occurrence of small hit rush)
On the other hand, during the "probability state", unlike during the normal state, "right-handed hitting" is advantageous, so the player proceeds with the game while aiming for the right-flowing path 3c. Here, during the latent probability state, the variation time of the special symbol 2 at the time of winning a small hit is a "short variation pattern (high-speed variation pattern)" in which the variation time is 2 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 36). In addition, the small hit winning rate on the special figure 2 side in the "probability state" is elected with a very high probability of "about 1/1.14 (see FIG. 4)". Therefore, when the lower right start opening 35 is won, a small win is won in almost every game, a short variation pattern is selected, a small win game occurs in a short time, and the lower big prize opening 50 is 1.2. Open for seconds. Also, during the latent state, it is placed under the 'no electric support state' in which the electric chew support function is not given, and the general electric open game does not occur (the auxiliary hit probability during the latent state is 1/200). Even if it occurs, the operating time of the movable piece 47 is very short, and it is difficult to enter the right starting port 33 .

Therefore, in the latent state, the game ball flowing down the right channel 3c of the game board 3 is first picked up by the channel correcting plate 37d and flows down to the left on the same channel correcting plate 37d. Then, it passes through the lower end of the flow path correction plate 37d and flows down onto the opening/closing door 42b of the upper grand prize opening 40, rolls to the right on the opening/closing door 42, and flows down from the lower end. Most of the game balls flowing down from the opening/closing door 42 are guided to the normal variable prize winning device 41 side of the electric chew by the guide nail (not shown) of the game board, that is, the right start port 33 side, and rarely flow down It is guided in the direction of riding on the plate 40d. The game ball guided to one of the electric chew sides does not enter the right starting port 33 because the general electric open game does not occur, and rolls leftward and downward on the movable piece 47, and the movable piece It flows down from the lower end of 47 and is guided to either the lower right starting port 35 side or the lower special variable winning device 52 side for small hits. In the case of this embodiment, approximately 40% of the game balls flowing down from the lower end of the movable piece 47 are guided to the lower right starting port 35 side, and the remaining 60% are guided to the lower special variable winning device 52 side for small hits. be. That is, a situation is created in which most of the game balls hit are guided to the lower right start opening 35 for the special symbol variation display game 2 and the lower big winning opening 50 for the small win.

The game ball guided to the side of the lower big prize winning port 50 for the small hit wins the lower big prize winning port 50 if the open door 52b is opened. The game ball guided to the other flow-down guide plate 40d side falls toward the lower big prize winning opening 50 located diagonally to the lower left, and rarely wins a prize there. On the other hand, the game balls guided to the lower right starting port 35 side do not necessarily win prizes to the lower right starting port 35, and the winning rate is about 80%, and a relatively large number of game balls are placed on the right side. The lower starting port 35 wins.

In this way, under the latent state, the normal electric open game is unlikely to occur, so the right-handed game ball is almost without being picked up by the electric chew, and is located below it, the lower right for special figure 2 Heading to the starting port 35 or the lower special variable winning device 52 for small hits, most of them win one of the winning ports. In addition, the winning rate to the lower right starting port 35 is relatively high, and the high-speed variation pattern is selected when a small win is won, so the execution frequency of the special symbol variation display game 2 per unit time is higher than other game states. get higher Therefore, in the latent definite state, a small winning game occurs frequently, and an average of 1 to 2 winnings are generated in the lower big winning opening 50 (10 prize balls) each time the small winning is won. It's like In other words, in the "latent state", a "small hit rush" occurs in which the balls are piled up by the small hit consecutive houses, and the longer the latent state continues (the more you get hooked without winning the big hit), the more the game The profit earned by the person increases.

(Regarding time-saving state and variable state)
On the other hand, the "time saving state" and "probability variable state" are placed under the "state with electric support" where the electric chew support function is given. In this state with the electric sapo, the general electric open game occurs with a high probability, and the opening time of the right start port 33 is also 0.1 seconds to 3.7 seconds under the state without the electric sapo (latency state, normal state). seconds. For this reason, most of the game balls flowing down the right flow path 3c are picked up by the normal fluctuation winning device 41 of the electric chew, and hardly win the right lower starting port 35.例文帳に追加Of course, not all the game balls are necessarily picked up by the electric chew and enter the right starting port 33 for the special figure 1, and the game balls that spill without entering the right starting port 33 are A prize may be won at the lower right starting port 35 for FIG.

Therefore, during the time saving state or the probability variation state, regarding the symbol variation display game, the occurrence of the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side is dominant, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side is difficult to occur, and the latent probability state. The opposite is the case. In addition, even if the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed, at the time of winning a small hit in the time saving state or the probability variation state, any of the super long variation patterns "10 minute variation 1 to 6 in non-potential probability" (variation time 600 seconds)” is selected (see FIG. 36), a situation is created in which it is difficult for the small winning game itself to occur for a long time, even though the small winning is highly likely to be won. Therefore, it becomes difficult to win the lower prize winning opening 50, and the above-mentioned "small win rush" in which small win games occur frequently in a short time does not occur.

In this way, the time saving state and the variable probability state are easy to enter the right starting port 33 of the special figure 1 side starting port by the electric chew support function, but since it does not involve the above-mentioned small hit rush, in terms of ball output performance, The degree of advantage for the player is overwhelmingly inferior to that in the latent certainty state. Especially in the case of this embodiment, the transition probability to the latent state under the time saving state or the probability variable state, that is, the "small hit rush" transition rate is also 50% on the special figure 2 side (see big hit 5 in FIG. 4), special figure 1 On the side, it is 15% (see jackpots 1 and 2 in FIG. 4). In this point as well, the advantage to the player is inferior to the latent state in which the big hit lottery on the special figure 2 side can be received frequently. In this respect, it is decisively different from a general pachinko game machine in which the profit state increases if there is an electric sapo in a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned "small hit rush" is configured to occur in a latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the configuration of the accessories and various prize-winning devices (41, 42, 51, etc.) arranged on the game board, the winning type, the auxiliary winning type, the winning game mode, the electric open game mode, etc. And/or under the time-saving state (under the game state with the electric sapo state), it may be configured such that a small hit rush can occur.

(Normal state → jackpot game)
Referring to FIG. 6, line L1 is the case of winning with a jackpot lottery probability of 1/320 in the special symbol variation display game 1 in the "normal state". When the special symbol display device 38a stops displaying the jackpot pattern, a jackpot game corresponding to the winning type is executed using the top special variable prize winning device 42 for the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 4, the winning types of special figure 1 include jackpots 1 to 4, and each selection probability (lottery probability) of "symbol lottery" is 10/200 (5%), 20/200 ( 10%), 100/200 (50%), and 70/200 (35%). When "big win 1" is selected (line L2) as a trigger to shift to the latent state, a "big bonus (big win game when a small win rush is confirmed)" is started. On the other hand, when jackpots 2 to 4 are selected (line L3), the “first battle bonus (jackpot game when small hit rush is not fixed)” is started.

In the above big bonus, a special blessing effect that blesses the transition to the latent state, that is, the "small win rush" appears as a hit effect. On the other hand, during the first battle bonus, a story-like presentation having a story like a so-called "battle presentation" appears as a presentation during the winning, in which the type of the big win won this time is concealed. Here, a battle production that expresses how the main character and the aliens fight appears. In this battle production, in the production during each round of the 1st to 7th rounds, a battle production is developed that gives an element of guessing which of the jackpots 2 to 4 the jackpot type is, and during the 7th round game, As a result of the battle production, the jackpot type won this time is definitely notified, that is, whether it is shifted to a variable probability state or a short time state, and whether the maximum number of rounds is 16R or 8R. be notified.

The game state after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the jackpot type won this time, as already explained (see FIG. 4). Regarding this, the line L4 shown in the figure is the route that shifts to the "potential state" after the jackpot game ends due to the jackpot 1 (normal time probability big hit), and the line L5 is the route according to the jackpots 2 and 3 (normal time probability variable jackpot). Line L6 shows the route of shifting to the "probability variable state" after the end of the big win game, and the route of shifting to the "time saving state" after the big win 4 (ordinary time reduction big win).

(Potential state → Small hit game → Potential state)
During the latent certainty state, the above-mentioned "small hit rush" that loops the small hit game as shown in line L7→line L8 can occur. This small win rush continues as long as the small win of 1/1.14 continues to be won without winning the big win of 1/137. In the small winning game, the lower large winning opening 50 for small winning is opened for 1.2 seconds, and the game ball that reaches the lower right starting opening 35 without being guided to the open lower large winning opening 50. Win a prize. Also, even if you win a small win, there is no transition to the internal game state (a small win is a win that does not trigger the transition to the internal game state), and when the small win game ends, it returns to the original "potential state" ( In line L8), a "small winning rush" is possible, and the number of acquired balls increases due to the small winning series, making it possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time.

In this way, during the latent certainty state, the player aims to win a prize at the lower right starting port 35 for the special figure 2 by hitting to the right, and advances the game with expectations for a small hit Renso (small hit rush). I will let you. Also, during the latent state, it will continue unless you win the jackpot 4, 8 of the latent time short-time jackpot or the latent time short-time jackpot 3, 6, 7 (the jackpot that triggers the transition to the time-shortened state or the latent variable state). be. Players can continue the current latent state without winning these jackpots, or even if they win a big hit, the latent time latent surety jackpot (jackpot) that will trigger the transition to the latent state again. 1, 2, 5), the game progresses (line L17).

Incidentally, when the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed before the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed, the small hit rush ends unless the special symbol 1 side loses. This is because when the special figure 1 wins a big hit (in the case of a big hit change), in the special figure 2 big hit lottery, all the big hits are excluded from the symbol lottery, and it is either a small win or a loss (Fig. 18 Steps S413, S414, Steps S431, S432 in FIG. 21), the small hit rush will continue, but when the big hit fluctuation on the special figure 1 side ends, the special figure 2 side will force " Lost pattern" (see steps S485 to S489 in FIG. 24), and the jackpot game won on the special figure 1 side is started, and the execution of the fluctuation display operation on the special figure 2 side is prohibited. be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the hit variation pattern of the special figure 1 in the latent state is selected in all the jackpots. A maximum of 4 minutes is the chance period of the small hit rush. However, even in such a case, if the jackpots 1 and 2 (latency time latent hits) are elected, it will be shifted to the latent state again (small hit rush in FIGS. 4 and 6 (see dashed frame), in effect, the small hit rush will continue.

(Probability state → small hit game, loss → probability state)
During the variable probability state, as already explained, most of the game balls heading for the lower big winning hole 50 on the downstream side are picked up by the electric chew, and the lower big winning hole 50 hardly wins. In addition, at the time of the small hit of the special figure 2, the "ultra long variation pattern (600 seconds)" is selected, and the situation is such that the small winning game is difficult to occur. Therefore, the "small hit rush" does not occur (line L10, line L11). In the case of this embodiment, during the "probability variable state", winning to the right starting port 33 occurs frequently, but the number of winning balls is 1, that is, even if the right starting port 33 wins, the net increase number is 0, In addition, the situation is such that it is difficult for a small winning game to occur, and since there is almost no winning in the lower prize winning opening 50, the number of balls paid out does not increase, and basically the number of balls possessed by the player is slightly reduced or the status quo is maintained. While the game progresses (the base value of electric chew prizes in the state with electric sapo is 100% or less). In addition, during the variable probability state, it is substantially continued until the next big win (ST prescribed number of times 65535 times), and the player expects that the big win in the variable probability state is a big win that triggers the transition to the latent probability state. I will be interested in playing games.

(Time-saving state → small hit game, loss → time-saving state)
Even during the "time saving state", it is placed under the game situation of the same phenomenon as the probability variable state (there is almost no prize in the lower big winning mouth 50, and the "super long fluctuation pattern" is selected when the special figure 2 is hit), and the small No hit rush occurs (line L13, line L14). In addition, since the time-saving state ends when the number of times of time-saving is 7 times or 50 times and is shifted to the normal state (lines L15, L20), the player can expect that the big hit in the time-saving state will trigger the transition to the latent state. You will enjoy the game while expecting to be.

(Potential state, probability change state, or jackpot winning during time saving state)
When a jackpot is won in the latent probability state, the probability variable state, or the time-saving state (lines L9, L12, L16), a hit medium performance and a jackpot game are started according to the jackpot type. In the drawing, as an example, a "second battle bonus" is started as a jackpot game during the consecutive game state. In this second battle bonus, as in the first battle bonus, a "battle effect" that conceals the jackpot type won this time appears. However, the battle effect of the second battle bonus has different effect contents from the battle effect of the first battle bonus. Here, even if any jackpot is won, the battle production is developed, and the jackpot type won this time is definitely notified as the result production of the battle production during the round game of the (final round) to the ending production. , That is, it is informed which of the latent probability state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state is shifted. Specifically, in the case of "big hits 1, 2, 5" that trigger the transition to the latent state, a blessing effect that informs the small hit rush rush (transition to the latent state) appears, "big hit 3, In the case of 6, 7", a chance effect to notify the probability variable rush (probability variable state transition) appears, and in the case of "jackpot 4, 8", the challenge effect to notify the time reduction rush (time reduction state transition) is displayed respectively. Appears as a result of the battle production. After the jackpot game, the state is shifted to a predetermined game state according to the jackpot type won this time (lines L17 to L19).

(Time saving state → normal state)
By the way, when returning to the normal state after finishing the time saving state, it is considered that there are many cases where the number of operation pending balls of special symbol 2 (special figure 2 operation pending balls) exists.

During the time saving state, winning to the right starting port 33 occurs frequently due to the action of the electric chew support function. For this reason, there is a high possibility that there will be a special figure 1 operation retention ball during the time saving number of times digestion. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball that spills without entering the right starting port 33 for the special figure 1 enters the lower right starting port 35 for the special figure 2 on the downstream side, and enters the lower right starting port 35. If you do, the fluctuation on the special figure 2 side will also start. The variation on the special figure 2 side during the time saving state is designed to select a super long variation pattern of 600 seconds at the time of loss and small hits (Fig. Medium 10 minute fluctuations 1 to 6”), the time it takes for one special figure 2 operation retention ball to be digested is very long, so there is also a special figure 2 operation retention ball when digesting a number of times in a short time, or There is a high possibility that Toku-zu 2 is fluctuating.

If you exit the time-saving state under such a gaming situation and shift to the normal state, for the main effect, the special figure 1 side is the same as during the time-saving state, "table fluctuation state", and the other special figure 2 side It is in the "reverse fluctuation state" (see FIG. 7(b) and FIG. 31E). Hypothetically, when the time saving state is exited, the special figure 2 operation suspension ball is accumulated up to 4 pieces, and if there is a big hit winning suspension in it, the variation pattern related to the special figure 2 in the normal state is, In order to prevent strategy hits, a 600-second super long variation pattern (10-minute variation 1 to 6) is selected for loss and small hits, and a 240-second long variation pattern (normal variation per 4 minutes) is selected (see normal column in FIG. 36 and normal column in FIG. 34). Assuming that the jackpot winning reservation is the second pending, the waiting time (until the fluctuation display of the second jackpot winning reservation stops) is about 14, excluding the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 currently in progress. It takes about 1 minute (10 minutes for ball operation pending + 4 minutes for big hit pending). It takes about (30 minutes of variation time of 3 operation suspension balls + 4 minutes of variation time of big hit winning suspension).

Therefore, many players quit the game without noticing that the special figure 2 is changing. Of course, even if the player quits the game, the variation of the special figure 2 is performed as it is, so when the symbol variation display game (big hit variation of the special figure 2) relating to the reservation of the winning of the big win ends, the big win occurs. (Condition device operation flag ON), after that, until the game ball passes through the role gate 57, the substantial jackpot game (round game) is not started, and it is placed under the "waiting state for the start of the round game". be killed. Under such circumstances, without any countermeasures, if the special figure 2 informs that a big hit has occurred in a reverse fluctuation state, the following problems will occur.

Although no one is playing, the data counter DT starts a big win notification (the above-mentioned big win notification function), giving surrounding players a sense of distrust and discomfort. In addition, while the data counter DT is announcing a big hit, there is a risk that a player who confirms that no one is on the gaming table will secure the table. There is a risk of causing troubles between players. Therefore, it is preferable that the data counter DT does not perform the big hit notification at least until the game ball passes through the combination gate 57 when the big hit is achieved.

(At the time of the first hit: When the jackpot is won during normal conditions)
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the outer end signal indicating that the big win is being played is output from the frame external terminal board 21 at the timing described below. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32(A) is a time chart showing output timing of a jackpot signal when a jackpot is won during a normal state.

The above "jackpot signal" is output when the special symbol stops with the jackpot pattern and the conditional device is activated (after the conditional device activation flag is turned on), and the continuous activation device is activated (continuous activation device activation flag is turned on). be done. The condition device operation flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is ON (=5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and the flag is OFF ( = 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress. Further, the above-mentioned "accessory product continuous operating device operation flag" is a flag for designating the operation state of the accessory continuous operating device, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), It indicates that it is in operation (round game can be continued), and if the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is not in operation (round game cannot be continued). The role continuous operation device operation flag is set to ON when the role-related gate sensor 57a detects a game ball in a special electric role product management process (step S095 in FIG. 13) described later, and the jackpot game ends. It is set to the OFF state at times.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 32(A), the main control unit 20 stops displaying the special symbol (here, special symbol 1) relating to the big hit, and a predetermined fixed display time (time t0 to time t1) elapses. In this case, a big hit occurs (after time t1 (after the conditional device operation flag is ON)), and until the game ball is detected by the combination gate sensor 57a, the jackpot signal is not output, and the game is played by the combination gate sensor 57a. Triggered by the detection of the ball (triggered by the accessory continuous operation device operation flag ON), a signal during the big hit is output (time ta). Then, although not shown, the output is stopped when the jackpot game ends (when the round game of the prescribed number of rounds ends). In addition, the above-mentioned "fixed display time" is a margin time width for notifying the stop display mode of the special pattern after the end of the special pattern fluctuation time. Transition is possible (see step S482 in FIG. 24, step S492 in FIG. 25, and steps S502 and S508 in FIG. 26, which will be described later).

Here, in this embodiment, even if the combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball before a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the occurrence of a big hit, the detection signal is treated as invalid. A "detection invalid period (time t1 to t2)" is provided. This detection invalid period (handling gate valid waiting time) is used as an effect time width for displaying a "right-handed instruction effect 135 (see FIG. 31A described later)" as part of the effect during winning. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the combination gate 57 during this detection invalid period, the round game is not started and the big hit signal is not output (see time te).

However, after the detection invalid period (hand-held gate valid waiting time) has passed (after time t2), the detection of the game ball by the hand-held gate sensor 57a is validated (see "hand-held gate" in the drawing). Therefore, during this valid period, when the combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball, a jackpot in-progress signal is output (time ta), and after a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms) elapses, the round game is started. is to be started (time tb).

As a result, at the time of the first hit, it is possible to prevent the execution of the big hit notification by the data counter DT at least until the game ball passes through the combination gate 57.例文帳に追加In particular, it is possible to prevent a sudden big hit notification by the data counter DT from being executed when the special figure 2 side is in a reverse fluctuation state. Also, at the time of the first hit, the fluctuation shortening signal is not output, and the data counter DT is based on the non-receipt of the "variation shortening signal" output in the time saving state, the probability fluctuation state, and the latent probability state. is received, it can be determined that the big hit this time is not the big hit in Renso, but the first hit.

(At the time of Renso (latency state, time saving state, or probability change state jackpot winning))
Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned "big hit signal", the "variable short time big hit signal" of the outer end signal indicating that the big win game is in progress is output from the frame external terminal board 21. Regarding "medium signal", the special symbol time saving function is in operation (while the special symbol time saving state flag is ON) during the big hit game (at the opportunity of the condition device operation flag ON). That is, the variable-short time jackpot signal is output at the start of a jackpot won during the probability state, the time-saving state, or the probability variable state.

FIG. 32(B) is a time chart showing the output timing of the variable-time jackpot signal when the jackpot is won during the latent state as an example of the game state during the special symbol time-saving function operation. Note that descriptions of contents similar to those in FIG. 32A will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate descriptions.

The "variable-short time jackpot signal" is output while the conditional device is in operation (while the conditional device operation flag is ON), and is output while the role product continuous operation device is in operation (while the role product continuous operation device operation flag is ON). Specifically, referring to FIG. 32(B), the main control unit 20 stops the special symbol related to the big hit (here, special figure 2), and the timing at which the big hit occurs at time t1 (condition device operation flag ON At the time), a signal is output during the variable-short time jackpot. Then, similarly to the big hit signal, the output is stopped when the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed (not shown).

When the data counter DT receives the big-hit signal or the variable-short time big-hit signal, it starts the big-hit notification. That is, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the case of "first hit (jackpot in normal state)" The timing of starting the notification of the big win by the data counter DT can be made different between the case of "when the big win is won". Concretely, at the time of consecutive games, prior to the time of the first hit, during the jackpot game, in other words, an outer end signal capable of specifying that the condition device is in operation is output.

More specifically, when a big hit occurs, at the time of the first hit (a big hit in the normal state), the variable-short time big-hit signal is not output (see FIG. 32A), and the above-mentioned big-hit signal Since only is output, the data counter DT side receives this jackpot in-progress signal and starts jackpot notification. Therefore, on the data counter DT side, the big win notification is not started only by the occurrence of the big win on the game machine 1 side, but the big win notification is started after the game ball passes through the combination gate 57.例文帳に追加On the other hand, during continuous play (a big win other than during the normal state), prior to the above-mentioned big win signal, a "variable short time big win signal" is output, so that the data counter DT side receives this variable short time big win signal. In response, before the game ball passes through the combination gate 57, that is, at the start of the big win on the gaming machine 1 side, the big win notification is started. In addition, when passing through the gate 57, the big-hit signal is output, but since the data counter DT side has already received the variable-short-time big-hit signal and started the big-hit notification, the big-hit is caused by the big-hit signal. Notification is not executed.

In this way, the reason why the start timing of the big hit notification by the data counter DT is different between the case of the first win and the case of consecutive games is that, in the case of the first win, the player is distrusted. From the viewpoint of preventing the above-mentioned problem, it is necessary to start the big hit notification by the data counter DT when passing through the role-linked gate (when the accessory interlocking operation device is ON). It is extremely rare to quit the game, and there is no problem even if the big win notification is started immediately when the big win occurs (timing when the conditional device operation flag is turned ON), and from the time of the big win occurrence, this is the case. (See FIGS. 31A to 31G, which will be described later).

In the case of the data counter DT that can distinguish between the initial winning time and the continuous winning time based on the variable shortening signal and the big winning signal, it may be configured not to output the variable short winning during big winning signal. Specifically, on the data counter DT side, when the fluctuation reduction signal is received (ON edge detection), the current game state is a game state with the operation of the special figure time saving function (in the case of this embodiment, time saving state, probability variable state, or latent state). On the other hand, on the gaming machine side, when a big hit occurs during the game state with the operation of the special time saving function, the output of the fluctuation reduction signal is stopped (the time saving function does not operate during the big hit), and the big hit occurs immediately after that. A medium signal is output (see the dashed line portion of the signal during the jackpot in FIG. 32(B)). Using such an output form, the OFF edge of the current special figure fluctuation reduction signal is detected after receiving the special symbol determination signal during the game state with the operation of the special figure time saving function on the data counter DT side. At the same time, when the ON edge of the signal during the big win is detected, it can be determined that the big win has occurred during the consecutive game. Of course, if it is possible to output any one of the variable short-time jackpot signal, the jackpot medium signal, and the variable shortening signal, it is possible to correspond to the data counter described above, and to correspond to various data counters DT. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

Although the details will be described later, the current jackpot in the normal state is the jackpot (jackets 1 to 4) on the special figure 1 side and the jackpot on the special figure 2 side. The effects (jackpot start effects (opening effects)) are different (see FIGS. 31A to 31G, which will be described later). In other words, if this big hit is the special figure 1 side big hit (special figure 1 table big hit) under the special figure 1 front fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state), and if this big hit is the special figure 1 table The big hit start performance is different in the case of the special figure 2 side big hit (special figure 2 back big hit) under the fluctuation state (special figure 2 back variation state). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent giving the surroundings a sense of incongruity and to effectively prevent hyena behavior by taking countermeasures against the performance during the hit.

(Concrete examples of effects on game machine 1 side and data counter DT side: FIGS. 31A to 31G)
31A to 31G show examples of effects on the side of the gaming machine 1 and examples of effects on the side of the data counter DT according to the game situation. 31A to 31G mainly show the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect contents of the light effect by the decoration lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) as the effect mode on the gaming machine 1 side.

In this embodiment, as already described, in any of the normal state, the variable probability state, and the time saving state, the main effect of the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 (special figure 1 table variation state) appear as In addition, in the case of the latent definite state, the symbol variation display game 2 related to the special figure 2 is made to appear as the main effect (special figure 2 table variation state). Therefore, depending on what kind of game state and what kind of jackpot was won, the effect during the big win game (performance during the win) may differ.

(Specific example at first hit: Figures 31A to 31B)
FIGS. 31A and 31B show transitions in the presentation contents of the gaming machine 1 (the presentation contents of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the decoration lamp 45) at the time of the first hit, and the presentation contents of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit (DT side). The transition of the jackpot notification mode) is shown. In FIGS. 31A and 31B, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, in a situation where the number of special figure 1 operation retention balls is 3 and the number of special figure 2 operation retention balls is zero, special figure 1 The jackpot is won in the pattern variation display game 1 on the side, and the jackpot is the first jackpot after the opening of the hall (here, the jackpot 1 on the 634th rotation from the opening of the hall (the normal latent hit jackpot that shifts to the jackpot rush) ) is assumed to be elected). That is, the big hit this time is the case of the special figure 1 side big hit (special figure 1 front big hit) under the special figure 1 front fluctuation state (special figure 2 reverse fluctuation state).

FIG. 31A(1) shows an example of an effect at the time of the first hit. With reference to FIG. 31A (1), in the liquid crystal screen, the symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 is displayed as the main effect (the effect under the normal effect mode) (special figure 1 table variation state, special Figure 2 back fluctuation state), in the lower left corner, as a sub-effect (sub-display area) different from the main effect, there is a dedicated display area 160 for the number of pending special symbols 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of variable display, It is indicated by four small squares. In the drawing, the dedicated display area 160 is exaggerated, and the actual screen occupation rate of the dedicated display area 160 is lower than illustrated. Also, the receiving seat J and the pending game execution K in the changing display area 78 are omitted.

Of the four squares related to this dedicated display area 160, the upper left square is the first reserved number display area 156 that displays the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls, and the upper right square is the special-figure 1 during variable display. It is a first change presence/absence display area 157 for displaying whether or not. In addition, the lower left square is the second reserved number display area 158 that displays the special figure 2 operation reserved ball number, and the lower right square is the second that displays whether the special figure 2 is being displayed fluctuatingly. A change presence/absence display area 159 is formed. In the first reserved number display area 156 and the second reserved number display area 158, the reserved number is indicated by Arabic numerals. , and "X" indicates that the symbol is stopped. In FIG. 31A (1), special figure 1 operation pending ball number "3", special figure 1 is variable state "⇔", special figure 2 operation pending ball number "0", special figure 2 is non-variable state "X ”. Regarding the display of the first fluctuation presence/absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence/absence display area 159, "X" indicates a lost symbol, "△" indicates a small winning symbol, and "◯" indicates a stopped display state with a big winning symbol. . Therefore, when any one of these "X", "Δ", and "○" is displayed, it indicates that the special symbols are in a non-variable state.

The image displayed in the first fluctuation presence/absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence/absence display area 159 indicates whether or not the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being displayed in a variable manner, so the three decorative symbols are different. As the fourth design of the special figure 1 or special figure 2, it is called the "4th design", and in some cases, the 4th design on the special figure 1 side is "decorative design 1 4th design" or "4th design 157 ”, the 4th pattern on the side of special figure 2 is also called “decorative pattern 2 4th pattern” or “4th pattern 159”. In addition, the dedicated display area 160 has four display areas 156 to 159 in any of the special figure 1 front variation state, special figure 1 back variation state, special figure 2 front variation state, and special figure 2 back variation state. It is designed to display the contents of

In FIG. 31A(1), when the big hit variation (symbol variation display game 1) of this special figure 1 ends, the combination of decorative symbols (decorative symbols 131) related to the kind of big win stops. Here, in the symbol variation display game 1 on the side of the special figure 1, which is the main effect, "777 (small hit rush entering confirmed pattern)" indicating the winning of "big hit 1 (normal latent probability big hit)" is stopped and displayed. example. However, in the illustration, it shows the stage of the state just before the final display of the variable display of the special figure 1, and the "777" of the decorative pattern 131 is in the temporary stop display state (shake fluctuation) just before the final display. The display contents of the dedicated display area 160 of the sub effect are the special figure 1 operation pending ball number "3", the special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) is in the variable state "⇔", the special figure 2 operation pending ball number "0" " piece, special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) is in a non-fluctuation state (loss symbol stop display state) "X".

After that, the variation of the special figure 1 ends (after the fixed display time has elapsed), and a big hit occurs. As a result, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. ○”, special figure 2 operation holding ball number “0”, special figure 2 (4th symbol 159) becomes non-fluctuation state (losing symbol stop state) “X”. Since the special symbol variation display game (variation of special symbols) is not executed during the jackpot game, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 remain unchanged until the jackpot game ends.

FIG. 31A (2) shows the performance situation on the gaming machine side 1 (liquid crystal screen, decoration lamp 45) and the data counter DT side at the start of the jackpot game.

On the game machine side 1, as a part of the performance during winning, a big win start performance 132 appears in which a large message of "big win" is displayed in the center of the screen and the decoration lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) is lit in rainbow colors. Along with the jackpot start effect 132, a right-hand hitting instruction effect 135 for instructing "right-hand hitting" appears. The jackpot start effect 132 and the right-hand hitting instruction effect 135 are displayed until the "win-win gate valid waiting time (for example, 5 seconds)" until the win-win gate sensor 57a is activated passes. In addition, "777" of the decorative pattern (decorative stop pattern) 131 is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner to display the combination of the decorative patterns that stopped the big hit this time. Incidentally, during the winning effect, an effect corresponding to the game state at the time of winning and the type of winning appears.

Also, at this stage, no jackpot signal is output (see time t1 in FIG. 32A), and as shown in FIG. is lit normally), and the display content of the data counter DT is not updated. Therefore, the display contents of the data counter DT in FIG. ”) is “634”, the display value of the total number of rotations display section DTc (hereinafter abbreviated as “total number of rotations DTb”) is “634”, the display value of the number of consecutive units display DTe (hereinafter “number of consecutive units DTe ) is zero.

Then, after the yaku-tetsu gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A winning instruction effect 137 appears. Here, as the gate winning instruction effect 137, a message "Aim for the gate!" and an arrow image appear.

(Regarding the appearance of the right-handed instruction effect 135 → the gate winning instruction effect 137)
Here, in the present embodiment, at the start of the big win, instead of simply instructing to aim at the winning gate 57, first, after giving an instruction to hit to the right in advance, the instruction to aim at the winning gate 57 is given. (After displaying the right-hand hitting instruction effect 135, the gate winning instruction effect 137 is displayed). The reason is as follows.

If an instruction is given to aim at the winning combination gate 57 immediately after the start of the jackpot, a game beginner does not know where the winning combination gate 57 is, so he either hits to the left or hits to the right. It is conceivable that a game ball may be launched appropriately without knowing whether the In the case of this embodiment, since the yakuren gate 57 is formed on the right flow path 3c side, if the player hits to the left, the player's profit is lost. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, first, after giving a right-handed instruction in advance (a right-handed instruction effect 135 appears for a predetermined time), an instruction to aim at the gate 57 is given (a gate winning instruction effect 137), a "kind instruction effect" appears.

Then, when the player passes the game ball through the role-linked gate 57 according to the gate winning instruction effect 137, the accessory continuous operating device is activated (the accessory continuous operating device flag is ON), and the frame external terminal board 21 is activated. A jackpot signal is output from (see time ta in FIG. 32(A)). Then, after a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms) has passed, the 1Rth round game (opening of the upper big winning opening 40 for big wins) is started (see time tb in FIG. 32(A)).

FIG. 31B(4) shows the effects on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side when the game ball passes through the combination gate 57. FIG. On the gaming machine 1 side, the mid-round effect 139 is started with the start of the round game. In the mid-round production 139, an animation image of an alien coming down from a disk, a message "Aim for the upper attacker" instructing the player to enter the upper prize-winning slot 40 for big wins, the number of current rounds, and the number of wins are displayed. A notification effect 130 or the like that displays the number of balls appears.

On the side of the data counter DT, receiving the big-win signal, the light-emitting part DTa emits light in rainbow colors or the like to start an independent big-win notification and update the display contents of the data counter. As for the display contents of the data counter, since the number of big wins DTd is the first win, it is updated to the value incremented by 1 for the current big win (the number of big wins is 1, the number of consecutive games resulting from the big win is 0). Although not shown, when the current big win game ends, the big win signal is turned OFF, and the data counter DT determines that the big win has ended, and resets the value of the number of starts DTb to zero.

(Example of production during small hit rush (during latent state): Fig. 31C)
After the jackpot game by the jackpot 1 described in FIG. 31C is completed, the state enters into the latent definite state (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31C(5) shows an ending effect related to jackpot 1 (normal time latent-definite jackpot), and FIGS.

The above-mentioned ending effect has a content of effect to report information about the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win, and the ending effect corresponding to the type of the big win is displayed. In this example, since the case of winning the jackpot 1 is explained, the ending effect 175 has the effect content of notifying that the state is shifted to the latent definite state (small win rush). FIG. 31C(5) includes an image of an alien and a message of "Alian Abduction Rush" indicating that the player is entering a potential state (small hit rush).

When the big win game by the big win 1 ends, the ending performance 175 ends, and the game state shifts to the latent sure state. In the latent state, it becomes a special figure 2 front fluctuation state (special figure 1 back fluctuation state), and the pattern variation display game 2 related to the special figure 2 is the main production (latent probability production mode (small hit rush production mode)) ).

FIG. 31C(6) shows an example of an effect when a game ball wins the lower big winning hole 50 for a small win in a small win game in the latent probability production mode (small hit rush production mode).

The increase effect 180 shown in FIG. 31C(6) notifies (displays) the number of winning balls (10 prize balls in the lower special winning opening 50) to be added to the number of winning balls each time the lower special winning opening 50 is won. At the same time, it has a production content that informs the cumulative value of the current number of acquired balls in real time. The current number of acquired balls is displayed in real time as the total number of acquired balls from the time of the first hit to the end of Renso (transition to normal state) (see FIG. 31E (12) described later). .

This increase effect 180 includes the acquired ball number reporting effect 177 for informing the current acquired ball number (approximate value), and displays the acquired ball number to be added to the current acquired ball number each time the player enters the lower grand prize-winning opening 50. It includes an additional ball number notification effect 178, an abduction effect 179 in which the number of winnings is reported by a character image, and the like. In addition, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. The number of balls is "4", and the special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) is in a non-fluctuation state (small hit symbol stop display mode) "△".

The effect example of FIG. 31C(6) shows a case in which two game balls successively win while the lower big winning hole 50 is opened by a small winning game. When a prize is won while the lower prize-winning port 50 is open, a number image of "+10" is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal screen by the addition ball number notification effect 178, and when this number image appears, The count value (current number of acquired balls) of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 is updated and displayed. Since the current count value is "Total 2180" (2180 shots won), the count value increases by "+10" from "Total 2190" to "Total 2200". In addition, in the abduction effect 179, one cow image 179a is displayed for each winning, and a effect image representing being taken away by a disc is displayed.

The difference between the increase effects 180 shown in FIGS. 31C(7) and 31C(6) is that the number image of "+10" by the addition ball number notification effect 178 is changed to a number image (emphasized number image 176) bordered in a predetermined color. In addition to the cow image 179 a , the character image 179 b of the girl is displayed in the abduction effect 179 .

The emphasized number image 176 is one mode of the fore-reading notice performance, and is a mode of performance suggesting the degree of expectation of winning in the reservation whether or not there is a jackpot winning reservation in the existing operation-reserving balls. This emphasized number image (additional ball number notification effect) 176 suggests the degree of expectation of winning within the holding due to the difference in border color. For example, the normal white (number image in FIG. 31C (6)), special border colors such as green, red, rainbow colors for advance notice, and number images with color patterns. It can be used as a preview performance. Here, the border colors of green, red, and rainbow colors suggest that the expectation of winning within the reserve is high in the order of these colors, and especially the border of the rainbow color indicates that there is a jackpot winning pending within the reserve. is deterministically indicated (precise in hold). It should be noted that, by changing the display mode of the number image, it is also possible to indicate the degree of expectation for winning while on hold. For example, providing numerical images expressed in Arabic numerals (“+10”), Chinese numerals (“+10”), Roman numerals (“+X”), etc., suggesting that the expectation of winning while on hold is high in this order. can be done.

In addition, the character image 179b is also one aspect of the pre-reading notice effect, and indicates the "winning type expectation" of what kind of winning type it is when there is a winning reservation within the reservation. The girl's character image 179b shown is a preview image (specific jackpot high-expectation look-ahead preview effect) suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation for a potential big hit (jackpot 5) that continues the small-hit rush. In this embodiment, in addition to the character images 179a and 179b, a plurality of types of character images are prepared, and depending on what kind of character image appears, there is an expectation of a latent probability big hit (big hit 5). degree, the expectation of the latent time probability variable jackpot (jackets 6 and 7), and the expectation of the latency time short jackpot (jackpot 8). Specifically, the cow image 179a indicates that the probability of the short-time jackpot (jackpot 8) is relatively higher than the other jackpots, and the boy character image (not shown) indicates that the probability is relatively high. In the case of the character image 179b of a girl, the late probability variable jackpot (jackpot 5) is relatively higher than the other jackpots. It is designed to notify that the degree of expectation is generally high (it may be accurate). Note that the appearance rates of the various character images described above may be different or the same, and can be determined as appropriate. However, the character image of the girl is positioned as a premium effect for notifying the small-hit rush continuation, and it is preferable that the appearance rate of the girl character image is relatively lower than that of the other character images.

In the case of the present embodiment, the emphasized number image 176 and the character image displayed by the abduction effect 179 determine whether or not there is a big hit winning pending among the existing operation pending balls, and if there is a big winning winning pending. An element of speculation as to what the type of winning will be can be given by the production of the winning ball number display system during the small win rush. As a result, the effects during the small winning rush are varied, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Modified example of production during small hit rush)
In addition ball number notification effects 176 and 178 of FIG. 31C (6) and (7), a numerical image of "+10" is displayed each time a prize is won, but the following display modes are possible. For example, when a prize is won in the lower big prize opening 50 during one small prize game, "+10" is displayed in the case of the first prize, "+20" is displayed in the case of the second prize, In the case of the third winning ball, "+30" is displayed, and in the case of the fourth winning ball, "+40" can be displayed (cumulative display type addition ball number notification effect). Then, the final value (+40 in this case) is added to the current value of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 to update the acquired ball number.

In addition, the effect content of the additional ball number notification effect may be changed according to the current number of acquired balls. For example, if the current number of acquired balls (total number of acquired balls) is 10,000 or less, the cumulative display type additional ball number notification effect of the above-described modification is performed, and if it exceeds 10,000, the above FIG. 31C (6) ( 7) Addition ball number notification effect.

Further, the increase effect 180 (at least one effect of 176 to 179) may be used to inform (suggest) the lottery result on the reverse fluctuation side. For example, when the special figure 1 on the back variation side is in the jackpot winning state (during the jackpot variation) while the special figure 2 is in a latent state where the front variation side means a big hit)”, etc.

It should be noted that the increase effect 180 is the content of the effect for notifying the number of balls obtained during consecutive games. Therefore, not only during the small hit rush (during the latent state, small hit rush production mode), but also during the time saving state (during the time saving production mode), during the definite variable state (during the definite variable production mode) ) can also appear. In addition, during a specific gaming state (for example, during a variable probability state (during a variable probability effect mode) and/or during a short time state (during a short time effect mode)), an emphasized numerical image (additional ball number notification effect ) 176 and/or the character images 179a and 179b may not appear.

(Concrete example of continuous residence: Fig. 31D)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31D, an example of an effect on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side at the time of "continuous game" will be described. FIG. 31D shows the state in which the jackpot 1 is won in the normal state in the above-described FIG. Shows the transition of the performance contents on the side of the game machine 1 (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the performance contents of the decoration lamp 45) and the transition of the performance contents of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit (the big hit notification mode on the DT side). is. That is, FIG. 31D is a case of the special figure 2 side big hit (special figure 2 front big hit) under the special figure 2 front fluctuation state (special figure 1 reverse fluctuation state). 31D to 31G described below, constituent elements that are substantially the same as the constituent elements in FIGS. 31A to 31B are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the details thereof are omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description. do.

FIG. 31D(8) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 when the jackpot (here, jackpot 8) is won in the lottery on the side of the special figure 2 during the latent certainty state. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 31D (8) to (10), the number of special figure 1 operation reservation balls that were accumulated in the normal state is consumed and there are two reservations, special figure 2 operation reservation balls In the situation where the number of is the maximum of 4, the 140th turn from the previous big hit, the pattern variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 shows an example of the production of the case where the jackpot 8 (latent time short time jackpot) was won. It is a thing.

With reference to FIG. 31D (8), in the liquid crystal screen, the symbol variation display game 2 related to the special figure 2 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the latent certainty effect mode) (special figure 1 back variation state, Special figure 2 table fluctuation state), dedicated display area 160 is displayed in the lower left corner. In the same figure, when the winning variation of the special figure 2 (symbol variation display game 2) is completed, the decorative symbols 138 are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols related to the type of the big winning. Here, in the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2, which is the main effect, "222 (symbol corresponding to the time reduction jackpot)" indicating the winning of the latent time reduction jackpot "jackpot 8" is stopped and displayed. ing. However, in the illustration, it shows the stage of the state just before the final display of the variable display of the special figure 2, and "222" of the decorative pattern 138 is in the temporary stop display state (shake fluctuation) just before the final display. Therefore, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. The number "4" and the special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) are in the variable state "⇔". Here, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are fluctuating in parallel.

After that, the big hit variation of special figure 2 is completed (determined display time elapsed), and the variation of special figure 1 (4th symbol 157), which was in a fluctuating state in parallel, is forcibly stopped with a losing pattern (forced losing pattern). It is displayed and a jackpot occurs. As a result, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. The number of operation pending balls is "4", and the special figure 2 is in a non-fluctuation state (jackpot design stop state) "○".

FIG. 31D(9) shows the liquid crystal screen at the start of the jackpot game and the effect situation on the data counter DT side. On the gaming machine 1 side, a variable-short time jackpot middle signal is output, and an opening performance (big win start performance) is started. On the liquid crystal screen, as part of the opening performance, a big win start performance 132 is displayed in which a message of "big win" is displayed on the rising sun flag background image and the decoration lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) is lit in rainbow color. Along with the jackpot start effect 132, a right-hand hitting instruction effect 135 for instructing "right-hand hitting" appears.

Further, on the side of the data counter DT, receiving the variable-short time big-hit signal, the light-emitting part DTa emits rainbow-colored light to start the big-hit notification and update the display contents of the data counter DT. As for the display contents of the data counter, the number of big hits DTd and the number of consecutive homes DTe are updated to the values obtained by adding 1 to the current big win (the number of big wins is 2, and the number of consecutive homes resulting from the current big win is 1). . Therefore, the display contents of the data counter DT in FIG. 634th rotation + this 140th rotation (total 774 rotations)". At the time of consecutive games, unlike the time of the first hit, before the game ball passes through the combination gate 57, the big hit notification by the data counter DT is started.

Then, when the combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 31D(10), a gate winning instruction effect 137 appears on the liquid crystal screen. When the game ball passes through the combination gate 57, a round game is started and an in-round effect (not shown) appears. When the game ball passes through the combination gate 57, a big-hit signal is output, but the data counter DT side has already started the big-hit notification by receiving the "variable short-time big-hit signal". Therefore, the jackpot notification caused by the jackpot middle signal is not executed (there is no problem even if it is executed again). Then, when the current big win game is over, the signal during the variable short-time big win is turned OFF, and the data counter DT determines that the big win is over, and resets the value of the number of starts DTb to zero.

(End of jackpot game→Time saving state→Normal state: FIG. 31E)
After the jackpot game by the jackpot 8 described in FIG. 31D is completed, the time saving state B (7 times of time saving times) is entered (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31E (11) shows the ending production related to the jackpot 8 (latent time reduction jackpot), and FIGS. be.

The ending effect 143 has effect contents for notifying that it will be shifted to the time saving state and the number of times of remaining time saving. In FIG. 31E (11), the image of the disc and the time saving transition notification image 141 including the mission message of "Enter the chance mode! Find the disc" and the time saving number of times notification image 142 including the message of "7 more times" It has become.

When the big win game by the big win 8 ends, the ending performance 143 ends, and the game state is shifted to the time saving state. Although not shown, in the time saving state, it becomes a special figure 1 front fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state), and the symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 is the main production (production under the time saving production mode) displayed as As in the normal state, hidden state, etc., a dedicated display area 160 is displayed in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal screen.

FIG. 31E(12) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen when the normal state starts after the time saving state ends (first game after the time saving state ends). In FIG. 31E(12), reference numeral 146 indicates a result effect. This result production is generally production content including information on the fact that the time saving state ends with this change (the fact that it shifts to the normal state) and the number of acquired balls acquired in a series of consecutive villas. Therefore, the "result effect" is normally an effect that should appear in the symbol variation display game at the final time (in this example, the 7th rotation of the final variation) when the time saving state ends.

However, in this embodiment, due to the simultaneous fluctuation type and its game characteristics, in the "time saving state", the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss of special figure 1 is an ultra-high speed fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (normal fluctuation in time saving 1s) is selected (see FIG. 35(b)). For this reason, it is not possible to ensure the effect time width of the result effect at the 7th rotation of the final variation.

Therefore, the result presentation is not displayed during the time saving state, and the result presentation is displayed at the first rotation after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In the "normal state", a variation pattern of 4 seconds at the shortest can be selected. Therefore, considering that the shortest variation pattern of 4 seconds (normal variation 4 seconds) is selected, the effect scenario configuration is such that the effect time width of the result effect itself is within 4 seconds. Of course, the result effect may appear in a pattern variation display game in which the time saving state ends. It is only necessary to select a variation pattern having a variation time that allows a sufficient effect to be produced.

Since the result effect 146 appears in the first rotation (first game) after shifting to the normal state, it does not notify that the time-saving state will end with this change like a general result effect. , It is preferable to have an effect that implies or suggests that the time-saving state has completely exited (falling to the normal state). For example, instead of a message such as "end of time saving mode", as shown in FIG. (including the first hit), and a winning ball number notification effect 145 showing an approximate value ("GET + 3530") of the winning ball number. It should be noted that the first rotation after the shift to the normal state may be a result effect that looks like the final variation of the time-saving state (in this example, the seventh rotation). In this case, since the normal state is pretended to be a time-saving state, it is preferable not to display the right-handed instruction effect 135 and the left-handed instruction effect 147 described later (FIG. 31E (12)).

Also, during the normal state, the symbol variation display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 is displayed as the main effect (the effect under the normal effect mode) as in the time saving state. Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (12), in addition to the decoration pattern 131 corresponding to the special figure 1, the reserved icon corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the reserved display area 76. In addition, since the result effect 146 is displayed in a large size in the liquid crystal screen, the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 (the lost decorative pattern of "556") is displayed in a small size in the lower right corner.

FIG. 31E (12) shows the stage of the state just before the fixed display of the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative pattern "556" is in the temporary stop display state (shake fluctuation) just before the fixed display. In addition, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. , Special figure 2 is in a variable state "⇔". Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating in parallel, but in this example, after this, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is terminated first, and the special figure 2 continues the fluctuation state be.

From FIG. 31E (13) onwards, it is assumed that the player who is currently playing the game knows that he is out of the time-saving state, has completely stopped launching game balls, and is preparing to leave.

FIG. 31E(13) shows the liquid crystal screen of the second rotation (second game) after the transition to the normal state. In the figure, a vertical arrow drawn within a square frame (within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36) indicates that the decorative pattern 131 is changing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the left-hand hitting instruction effect 147 is caused to appear in the following second game because the result effect appears in the first game after shifting to the normal state. This left-handed instruction effect 147 is displayed at the start of the current game (second game), and is terminated after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds).

Also, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E(13), one special-figure 1 operation reserved ball has been digested from the previous game, and two reserved icons are displayed. In addition, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. , Special figure 2 is in a variable state "⇔". Here, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are fluctuating in parallel.

(Regarding the case where the player left the seat when the back fluctuation was during the big hit fluctuation)
After that, the two special figure 1 operation reserved balls are all digested, the symbol variation display game 1 related to the last operation reserved ball is finished, and the special figure 1 is on standby with 0 special figure 1 operation reserved balls, and now A player who has been playing until then confirms that the result of the last symbol variation display game is "losing", and notices that the hold of special figure 2 remains or is changing. Let's assume a case where a player quits this game machine without paying attention. It should be noted that, after this player leaves the seat, the explanation will proceed on the assumption that no one is playing on the gaming machine.

FIG. 31E (14) shows that for special figure 1, there are 0 special figure 1 operation pending balls, and the decorative pattern 131 is stopped (waiting) with the missing pattern "135", and for special figure 2, 3 One of the special figure 2 operation suspension balls is digested, a new special figure 2 variation (symbol variation display game 2) is started, and the second operation suspension ball used for this symbol variation is , shows a case in which the winning of the jackpot was temporarily suspended. To put it simply, under the special figure 2 back variation state, the special figure 2 is a game situation during the big hit variation (big hit variation during the back variation (variation per 4 minutes during normal)). Therefore, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. The number of pending balls is "2", and the special figure 2 is in a fluctuation state (here, during the big hit fluctuation) "⇔".

When the operation holding ball of special figure 2 is stored, as already explained, in the case of loss fluctuation or small hit fluctuation in "normal state", the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (10 minute fluctuation 1 6), the symbol variation display game 2 is played for a long time of 240 seconds (usually variation per 4 minutes) even if the game is a big hit.

During the normal state, it is a relationship of "special figure 1 front fluctuation state, special figure 2 back fluctuation state". Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (14), the effect related to the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 is not displayed, and the result of the last executed symbol variation display game 1 on the side of the special figure 1 As a result, the decorative pattern 131 corresponding to the special figure 1 is in a state of being stopped at "135 (loss eye)" indicating a loss.

After that, time elapses, and the big hit variation during the reverse variation (variation per 4 minutes during normal) ends. As a result, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. The number of operation pending balls is "2", the special figure 2 is in a non-fluctuation state (big hit pattern stop state) "○", and the special figure 2 of the back fluctuation is a big hit.

FIG. 31F (15) shows a game situation in which the "special figure 2 back big hit" has occurred after the big hit variation (normal variation per 4 minutes) during the back variation. In the figure, the liquid crystal screen displays a 'back-right hitting instruction effect 135a' in a display mode near or partially overlapping the dedicated display area 160 to instruct a 'right hitting'. This back-to-right instruction effect 135a is displayed smaller than the dedicated display area 160. - 特許庁In addition, when a jackpot game with a back jackpot occurs, the right-handed instruction effect is displayed without any other related effects.

This back-right hitting instruction effect 135a is terminated after the elapse of the winning waiting time (5 seconds). This point is the same as the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIGS. 31A(2) and 31B(3). It should be noted that the performance control section 24 can ascertain whether or not the game is a big hit due to the back fluctuation by the "big win start command" transmitted from the main control section 20 at the start of the big win game. This jackpot start command includes game state information at the time of winning and jackpot type information about the win. When the performance control unit 24 receives the jackpot start command, if the information included in this is, for example, that the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and the jackpot type is one of jackpots 5 to 8, this time It can be grasped that the big win is a big win due to the back fluctuation. Of course, another command may be used, or a dedicated command may be provided so that the effect control section 24 side can identify whether or not it is a big hit due to a reverse variation.

Referring to FIG. 31F (16), after the continuation gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) has elapsed, a 'back gate winning instruction effect 137a' for instructing the game ball to pass through the continuation gate 57 appears. This back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a gate winning instruction effect that is displayed quietly without any other related effects, similarly to the back right hitting instruction effect 135a. The back gate winning instruction effect 137 a is displayed until the game ball passes through the combination gate 57 . This point is the same as the case of the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIG. 31B (3)).

In addition, regarding the decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45), since the big hit this time is the special figure 2 back big hit, the normal jackpot light effect (for example, the decorative lamp 45 of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. 31A (2) (jack start) Effect 132)) is not executed. In this embodiment, the light effect and the sound effect are in the same effect state (for example, lights off) as during waiting for customers. In this presentation state, it waits for the game ball to pass through the Yakuren gate 57.例文帳に追加

As described above, in this embodiment, when the current big hit is the special figure 2 back big hit, although the instruction effects 135 and 137 appear, the display is executed quietly, and the display is flashy like the special figure 1 front big hit. A jackpot start performance (opening performance) is not displayed, and the effect of the big win is reported as secretly as possible. In this way, by taking countermeasures against the back big win during the performance during the win, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity given to the surroundings even if the big win suddenly occurs from an unoccupied game machine, and to effectively prevent the hyena act. You can do it.

In addition, in FIG. 31F (17), when the game ball passes through the combination gate 57, as in FIG. is started. In addition, the data counter DT side also starts the big hit notification, and updates the data display contents (the number of big hits DTd, etc.) (see the data counter DT in the lower part of (4) in FIG. 31B).

(Notice effect during special jackpot: Fig. 31F)
By the way, under the gaming situation of FIG. Until then, the back gate winning instruction effect 137a continues to appear, and the state is waiting for the start of the round game. This back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a relatively small message displayed in the lower left corner, and is difficult to notice. It is assumed that a player who is seated on the gaming table in such a state will start the game while aiming to win a prize at the middle start hole 34 by hitting to the left as usual. Also, in the simultaneous fluctuation type, if one special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation of the other special figure will be stopped due to a forced loss, or the fluctuation display will continue while the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted, so a new fluctuation can not be started, and even if a game ball wins in the middle start port 34, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not start, giving the player a sense of distrust. In such a case, it is preferable to notify the player as soon as possible that a big win (back big win) is in progress.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the currently occurring jackpot is caused by winning the jackpot (back jackpot) on the side of the reverse fluctuation state, the fact that the jackpot is underway is reported under a predetermined appearance condition. It has a configuration that allows the appearance of a “special jackpot announcement effect”. The conditions for the appearance of the special jackpot in-progress notification effect can be, for example, the following conditions A and B.

(Condition A) Winning a big hit in the special drawing side jackpot lottery, which is a reverse fluctuation, and a predetermined time T has passed since the start of the jackpot fluctuation (to satisfy the relationship of "fluctuation time ≤ T").
(Condition B) There was a prize to the start gate on the special figure side that will change the table.
Under the condition that the above condition A and condition B are satisfied, a special jackpot in-progress announcement effect is displayed.

To explain with a specific example, the main control unit 20 wins a jackpot on the special figure 2 side during the normal state (special figure 2 back jackpot winning), and the jackpot variation pattern related to the back variation "Normal middle When "variation per 4 minutes" is selected, a variation pattern designation command that can specify the variation is transmitted to the performance control unit 24, and the elapsed time from the start of variation per 4 minutes during normal operation is measured. Then, as a predetermined period of time, for example, the variation will end in four minutes during normal operation. When 4 minutes have passed, a special effect control command (during the back big hit command) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . When receiving the command during the back jackpot, the performance control part 24 controls the performance state (performance mode) to the ``waiting state for execution of the notification performance during the special jackpot'' and waits for the winning of the special figure 1 start port. Specifically, it waits for the pending addition command on the special figure 1 side to be sent. Waiting for the pending addition command is because, as described above, if one of the special symbols is a big hit, the other special symbol cannot start a new variation, and the main control unit 20 issues a command related to variation display ( For example, it is not possible to transmit a variation pattern designation command, etc.). For this reason, the pending addition command is optimal as the command that triggers the execution of the special jackpot in-progress notification effect.

When receiving the reserved addition command on the side of the special figure 1 while waiting for execution of the special big-hit announcement performance, the performance control part 24 makes the special big-hit announcement performance appear. Although there are no particular restrictions on the content of the special jackpot in-progress announcement, the content of the presentation showing that the back jackpot is in progress is preferable. For example, from the viewpoint of the above-mentioned kind instruction effect, regardless of whether or not the yakuren gate effective waiting time has passed, at least the right-handing instruction effect 135 is caused to appear large on the liquid crystal screen, and the player is instructed to hit to the right. Encouragement is preferred. In addition, it is also possible to control to a state of waiting for the execution of a special big-hit announcement effect, triggered by the reception of the big-hit start command. In this case, it can be controlled to wait for the execution of the special big-hit notification effect from the time when the back big-hit occurs.

(Background fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect: Fig. 31G)
In addition, the same problem as in the game situation of FIG. 31F (15) and (16) described above occurs in the game situation of FIG. can also occur.

Specifically, in the game situation of FIG. 31E(14), the reverse variation is during the big hit variation (variation per 4 minutes during normal). In such a game table, since the main object of effect is the symbol variation display game 1, the player normally hits to the left and advances the game while aiming to win a prize at the middle start hole 34. It is thought that it will continue to grow. However, when the special figure 2 is a big hit change, the special figure 1 big win lottery executed during the change becomes ``a lottery without a big hit (losing lottery)'', and a prize is won in the middle starting port 34. Even if you let it and receive a jackpot lottery, it will return to nothing. In such a case, it is preferable to notify the player as soon as possible that the hidden variation currently being executed is the big win variation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation related to the tail variation is in progress, it is possible, under predetermined conditions, to display a "background variation mid-jackpot announcement effect" that notifies that the tail variation is a big hit. It is possible. For example, condition C below can be used as the condition for the appearance of the back fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect.

(Condition C) Winning a jackpot (for example, one of jackpots 5 to 8) in the jackpot lottery on the special figure side related to the back variation (for example, special figure 2 in normal state) (special figure 2 back jackpot winning), If the special figure related to the big hit is fluctuating (if the special figure 2 is fluctuating (symbol variation display game 2 is running)), the special figure side (special figure 1) start port (for example , There was a prize to the middle start port 34) (condition C-1), or that the fluctuation of the special figure side (special figure 1) related to the table fluctuation was started (condition C-2).
Under the condition that the above condition C is satisfied, the big hit announcement effect during the reverse fluctuation is displayed. Either one of the above (condition C-1) and the above (condition C-2) can be employed.

To explain with a specific example, the main control unit 20 wins the jackpot on the special figure 2 side during the normal state (special figure 2 back jackpot win), and "variation per 4 minutes during normal" related to the jackpot win is selected, a variation pattern specification command capable of specifying the variation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. - 特許庁When the production control unit 24 receives this variation pattern specification command, the production control unit 24 grasps that the current variation pattern is "variation per 4 minutes during normal", Control to "waiting for execution of jackpot announcement effect". And the production control unit 24 waits for the pending addition command on the special figure 1 side to be sent when the above (condition C-1) is used as the appearance condition, and the above (condition C-2) is currently set. In the case of output condition, it waits for the variation pattern designation command related to special figure 1 to be sent. The production control unit 24 receives the reserved addition command on the side of the special figure 1 (in the case of the above (condition C-1)) or receives the variation pattern designation command under the state of waiting for execution of the big hit announcement production during the back fluctuation In the case (in the case of the above (condition C-2)), the big hit announcement effect during the reverse fluctuation is displayed. In addition, when the back-fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect is to appear, it can be made to surprise the player by making it appear suddenly, and the degree of impact at the time of appearance is high. For example, after the liquid crystal screen is displayed in blackout (blackout effect), a big hit announcement effect during reverse fluctuation is displayed.

(Concrete example of back fluctuation medium jackpot announcement effect: Fig. 31G)
FIG. 31G shows an example of the effect of the back fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect. Here, as in FIG. 31E (14), for the special figure 1, there are 0 special figure 1 operation pending balls, and the decorative pattern 131 is stopped (waiting) with the losing pattern "135", and the special figure For 2, it is assumed that there are two special figure 1 operation holding balls, and special figure 2 is usually fluctuating per 4 minutes (jackpot fluctuation related to back fluctuation). FIG. 31G (14A) shows that, under this gaming situation, there is a prize at the middle start port 34, the above (condition C-1) or the above (condition C-2) is satisfied, and the back fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect is displayed. This is the case shown. Therefore, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. , Special Figure 2 is in a state of fluctuation (normally fluctuating every 4 minutes) "⇔". Further, FIG. 31G (14B) shows a reverse fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect when 30 seconds have passed from the state of FIG. 31G (14A).

Reference numeral 173 in FIG. 31G (14A) is a back fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect. The back fluctuation middle jackpot announcement effect 173 has effect contents including a countdown timer 170, a message 171, a plurality of disk images 133, and the like.

The countdown timer production 170 displays the elapsed time (approximate value may be used) from the start of the jackpot fluctuation (fluctuation per 4 minutes during normal) related to the back fluctuation (here, special figure 2), and how much has ended at the present time A countdown display is made to notify the player of when the variation ends and when the big win starts. Also, the message 171 consists of "A super chance has arrived! Don't shoot the ball! Don't leave your seat and wait for the remaining 200 seconds!" 2 (backward fluctuation) is that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or accurate, and (b) if the ball is shot with the message "Don't shoot the ball!" and (c) the message "Don't leave your seat and wait for the remaining 200 seconds!" Also, a large army of UFOs (a plurality of disk images 133) are displayed, among which a cow image 134 is displayed. This cow image 134 indicates that there is a high possibility of winning jackpots 5 to 7 (ordinary probability variable jackpots). It indicates that one of 5 to 7 has been elected.

In addition, the back variation mid-big hit announcement effect 173 is one aspect of the hit probability effect for notifying that the back variation is a big win variation (jackpot winning state). Therefore, during the appearance of the back fluctuation jackpot announcement effect 173, the announcement effect (ready-to-win effect etc.) related to the symbol change display game 1 (front change side) on the special figure 1 side and the pre-reading announcement effect are not caused to appear, and the notice To cancel all performances even if they are being executed. However, the decorative pattern 131 related to the special figure 1 is not displayed during the fluctuation, but when the fluctuation ends, a small missing eye is stopped and displayed in the lower right corner, and the symbol fluctuation display game 1 on the side of the special figure 1 is finished. (See FIG. 31G (14B)). In addition, while the back-fluctuation mid-jackpot announcement effect 173 is appearing, the ``left-handed warning notification effect'' and the ``right-handed warning notification effect'' are not executed.

<Processing on Main Control Unit Side: FIGS. 8A to 30C>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8A to 30C, game operation processing on the side of the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side includes an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: FIGS. 8A and 8B) and a timer interrupt processing (main control side timer interrupt Processing: FIG. 13).

<10. Main control side main processing: FIGS. 8A and 8B>
Main processing on the main control unit 20 side (main control side main processing) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8 . 8A and 8 are flowcharts showing details of main processing on the main control unit 20 side. This main process is started when a system reset occurs during recovery from a power outage or power failure, or when the control program goes out of control, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU is stopped. In some cases, it is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first initializes the values of the registers of each unit including the CPU 201, monitors the power supply state of the peripheral substrate, and so on. Initial setting processing necessary for starting the game operation is executed (step S011). This initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, the information of the input port 1 (not shown) is acquired and set in the W register (step S012), the W register is subjected to a predetermined masking process, and the "setting key switch 94 ( setting key signal), the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal), and the input state (ON/OFF state) of the door open sensor 61 (door open signal) (step S013). The information of the input port 1 according to the present embodiment (information indicated by the least significant bit (b0) to the most significant bit (b7)) is, as illustrated, the ON/OFF state (b0 ), ON/OFF state (b1) of RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), ON/OFF state (b2) of door open signal (door open sensor 61), disconnection detection signal 1 (b3), disconnection detection signal 2 (b4), ON/OFF state of count error signal (ball counting sensor 19b) (b5), ON/OFF state of out-of-supply signal (out-of-supply detection sensor 19a) (b6), power-on signal and dispensing communication confirmation signal is in the ON/OFF state (b7). For example, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by the hall clerk. there is The setting key signal is one of signals for determining whether or not to shift to a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed. It has a value corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the switch 94 . Therefore, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting change signal is delayed, the hall clerk takes his hand off the switch and misses the ON operation. In addition, these signals are quickly acquired when power is restored.

In this embodiment, the combination of the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door open sensor 61, specifically, the bit pattern "W (x, y, z): x, y, z = 1 (ON state) or 0 (OFF state)” according to the transition processing state (branch determination condition) designated by “setting change processing (step S022)”, “setting confirmation processing (step S026)”, “area RAM clearing processing (step S028)”, and “backup restoration processing (step S027)”. It's like The above transition processing state (branch determination condition) is as shown in FIG. 8C. is "setting check transition state", W (0, 1, 1 or 0) is "RAM clear transition state", and W (0, 0, 1 or 0) is "backup recovery transition state". . Since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the game machine, the front frame 2 must be opened when these switches are operated. , ON state (door opening signal ON). In addition, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, at least until the game start ready state is established (for example, before the processing of step S035 (CTC setting processing) described later is executed (main control side in FIG. 13) Before timer interrupt processing is started), or at least before the loop processing of steps S039 to S042 is executed), door open error notification is executed even if the front frame 2 is in an open state (door open state). It is designed not to. However, when the door open sensor 61 is ON, information indicating that the door open sensor 61 is ON is transmitted to the hall computer HC by a security signal.

(Setting Change Processing Execution Processing Route: Steps S020 to S023)
In the processing of step S014, it is determined whether or not the bit pattern of the W register is W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014). If it is W (1, 1, 1) (step S014:=W (1, 1, 1)), it is considered to be in the "setting change transition state", and first, the " During setting change command (BA5AH)” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S020). When the performance control unit 24 receives the display command during setting change, it uses the performance means to execute the performance during setting change for notifying that the setting value is being changed. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is turned on in all blue colors, the speaker 16 is caused to output an alarm sound of "setting is being changed♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an effect image of "setting is being changed".

Next, the internal RAM initialization process (RAM clear process at power-on) is executed (step S021). In this area RAM initialization process, all areas (normal data storage area) is initialized (cleared) to restore the operating state of the gaming machine to the initial state (step S021). In the present embodiment, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are stored in an area (outside area memory (second memory area)). Specifically, the main control unit 20 controls the first RAM area (intra-area RAM ) and a second RAM area (outside RAM ), a first ROM area (ROM in area) for storing a game control program for executing the normal game process, and a second area for storing an information display control program for executing the information display process. 2ROM area (outside ROM area) and CPU201 that executes a game control operation based on a game control program and an information display control program. Here, the object to be cleared is only the RAM area (internal RAM) related to the internal memory. It should be noted that data in the set value storage area (set value data) is not cleared, even if it is data in the RAM within the area. Initialization, change, etc. of the set value data are performed in the later-described setting change process (FIG. 11).

Various flags used mainly in step S039 of FIG. 8B and steps S081 to S085, S089 to S095, S097 to S100 of timer interrupt processing in FIG. Various data such as operation timers and counters are stored (stored in storage areas corresponding to the various data), and representative data include the following.

Flags related to various functions for specifying the game state ("general public goods open extended state flag" that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, "normal symbol time saving state flag" that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function , "Normal pattern probability change state flag" that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function, "Special symbol time reduction state flag" that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability change function, "Special symbol that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability change function probability change state flag")
"Special pattern time saving number counter" that counts the number of times the special pattern time saving function is operated, "Special pattern probability change number counter" that counts the number of times the special pattern probability change function is operated,
Various data related to big hit lottery results (big hit judgment flag, small hit judgment flag, special design judgment data, special stop design number, etc.)
"Various data related to the execution of the winning game (current number of rounds (number of times of operation of special electric accessories), specified number of rounds, number of winning openings, condition device operation flag, small winning medium flag, accessory continuous operation device operation flag etc)",
"Parameters related to the operation state of special symbols (special symbol stop 1 flag, special symbol stop 2 flag, fluctuating flag, special symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "various operation timers to manage game progress (performance (excluding timers related to display)",
"Game state data (game state number YJ) that can specify the current game state",
"Input/output data related to switches and sensors (excluding input data of sensors such as winning gates related to performance display)",
They are "winning counter for counting the number of winning balls", "various error flags", and the like.
In any case, when the area RAM initialization process (step S021) is executed, all data other than specific data (set value data, data used to display the base value) are set to the initial state. .

Although details will be described later, a predetermined area (outside RAM) of the RAM 203 related to the outside memory, that is, a RAM area related to the performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, LED data setting related to the performance indicator 99 area, etc.) is configured to perform initialization processing (outside RAM clearing processing) when a problem occurs in the RAM area in the performance display monitor processing (step S101) of FIG. 28 described later ( (See step S101 in FIG. 13, step S823 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30A, etc.). In this manner, the work area of the RAM 203 is divided, and the RAM outside the area is not initialized (cleared) in the RAM initialization process at power-on. As a result, even if the RAM is initialized when the power is turned on, the data regarding the performance display, such as the normal number of payouts, the number of normal outages, and the base value, can be inherited across power outages. It is possible.

Then, after the RAM initialization processing in the area (step S021) is completed, setting change processing for changing the setting value is executed (step S022). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In order to determine that the setting change transition state (the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state (here, the door opening sensor 61 is assumed to be in the ON state)), the It is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 while keeping the power supply (main power supply) turned off (power OFF), and turn on the power (power ON) while the power supply is in the ON state. That is, in order to change the setting value, the front frame 2 is opened, the setting key switch 94 is turned to the setting value change mode side (ON operation) while the power of the game machine is turned off, and the RAM clear switch 98 is operated. It is necessary to turn on the power while keeping the ON operation. This is because when the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON after turning on the power to the game machine, it takes at least several seconds from turning on the power until the ON operation. This is because it is determined that the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is in the OFF state (step S014: ≠ W (1, 1, 1)), and the setting change processing in step S022 is not executed. . In this case, as shown in the figure, the processing route for executing step S015 is traced, and thereafter control is performed so that the change operation of the set value is prohibited. Therefore, if the power is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 when it is desired to change the setting value, the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 should be turned off after the power is turned off. is turned ON, and the power is turned on again. It should be noted that when the setting change process is executed, even if the RAM clear switch 98 is set to the OFF state, the permission state of the setting change operation is maintained.

When the setting change process (step S022) is completed, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted (step S023), and the process proceeds to step S032 shown in FIG. 8B described later. When the production control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, a customer waiting production (customer waiting demo screen) for explanation and introduction (demonstration) of the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed based on a predetermined appearance condition. appear. In addition, the process after the process of step S032 is demonstrated later for convenience of explanation.

Returning to the description of step S014, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014: ≠ W (1, 1, 1)), then the RAM is abnormal. It is determined whether or not there is (step S015). The data in the RAM area to be determined here is the set value data in the set value storage area. In this embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are defined, and values 00H to 05H are defined as data specifying these setting values 1 to 6. FIG. Therefore, the setting value data (normal value) of any one of 00H to 05H should be stored in the setting value storage area. However, due to some trouble such as noise, the set value data may become an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H.

Therefore, in this process, the setting data is acquired from the setting value storage area, and if the acquired setting value is not a value of 00H to 05H (if it is not a normal value), that is, the acquired setting value is one of the setting values 1 to 6. If none of the above apply (step S015: YES), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data (the set value data is not valid), and the process proceeds to step S018, and the power is turned on again as RAM error processing. A command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018). When the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, the effect means is used to execute the power re-on instruction effect. For example, all the decoration lamps 45 are lit in red, the speaker 16 outputs an alarm sound, and an effect image such as "RAM error Please turn on the power again and set the set value to 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. display. Then, a first power failure check process shown in FIG. 10A, which will be described later, is executed (step S019).

If it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the determination process of step S015 (step S015: NO), it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is normal (5AH) (step S016). The backup flag BF is set to 5AH (normal value) in the process of the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 13), which will be described later. When the power is turned on or when the system is recovering from a power failure, the content of the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, if for some reason a problem occurs and the backup flag BF is not a normal value (such as 00H) (step S016: ≠ 5AH), the above-described RAM abnormality (when the determination result in step S014 is YES) is performed. Similarly), the process proceeds to step S018, a power re-on command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018), and the first power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S019).

(10-2-1. First power supply abnormality check process: FIG. 10(A))
The processing of the first power supply abnormality check processing (step S019) will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing details of the first power supply abnormality check process.

In FIG. 10(A), the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S056), and if the ON state of the power failure signal indicating power failure is confirmed (step S057: NO), the CPU 201 exits the first power failure check process. . That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the contents stored in the RAM 203, the WDT clearing process (step S056) and the power interruption confirmation process (step S057) are infinitely repeated, and the system is placed in a power-on waiting state. Therefore, when a RAM error occurs, the processing related to the progress of the game does not proceed thereafter, and the game is played until the power is turned on again (in the case of this embodiment, until the setting change processing of step S022 is executed). The operation is stopped (game stop processing). When a RAM error occurs, WDT clear processing is executed until a power failure signal is confirmed, and WDT reset does not occur at the timing when infinite loop processing is repeated.

If the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal is confirmed (step S057: YES), the process returns to step S011 in FIG. 8A, and the processes after step S011 are sequentially executed in the same manner as when the power is turned on.

However, in this embodiment, even if a RAM error such as a set value data error (RAM error) or a backup error (backup flag error) occurs, the contents of the RAM 203 are cleared in subsequent processing (steps S018 and S019). No action is taken. Therefore, if the set value data and backup data remain corrupted, even if the power is turned on again, the corrupted data will remain. =W(1, 1, 1)), steps S018 to S019 are executed again. Therefore, once a RAM error occurs, the RAM error cannot be resolved simply by turning on the power again, and the RAM error will not be resolved unless the setting change processing in step S022 is executed. For this reason, in step S018, the power re-on command is transmitted, and the effect control unit 24 that receives this command outputs a RAM error notification (power re-on instruction effect) to the liquid crystal display device 36 as "RAM error. Power on again. Please set the set value to 1." is displayed to urge the hall clerk to resolve the RAM error.

Returning to the description of step S015 in FIG. 8A. If the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO) and the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016:=5AH), the W register is subjected to a predetermined masking process, and the setting key switch 94 (setting key signal) and the input information of the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal) are obtained (step S017).

(Backup restoration processing execution processing route: step S24→S027)
Next, referring to FIG. 8B, it is determined whether or not the bit pattern of the W register is W (0, 0) corresponding to the backup return transition state (step S024). If it is W (0, 0) (step S024:=W (0, 0)), it is considered to be in a "backup return transition state (see FIG. 8C)", and based on the backed up game information immediately before the power shutdown. Backup return processing for restarting the game is executed (step S27).

In this backup restoration process, first, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored based on the contents of the RAM (backup data saved at the time of the power interruption) saved by the backup function (not shown) at the time of the power interruption. , a return process necessary for starting the game from the processing state at the time of power cutoff is performed, and the game operation at the time of power cutoff is restored (game return means). Also here, predetermined game information (for example, special figure 1 / special figure 2 operation reserved ball (reserved data) at the time of power shutdown, information on winning game, game state information, etc.) is acquired from the backup data, and the information is One or a plurality of types of game return commands included are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. - 特許庁Upon receiving the game return command, the performance control unit 24 grasps the game progress state at the time of power cutoff based on the game information included therein, and restores the performance state at the time of power cutoff. When the restoration process is finished, a power failure restoration display command (BA03H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the backup restoration process is finished. When the presentation control part 24 receives the power failure restoration display command, the presentation means is used to display the ``restoration completion presentation'' for notifying that the recovery is completed. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an effect image such as "restored from power outage, please restart the game". After completing the backup restoration process, the process proceeds to step S032, which will be described later.

(RAM clear processing execution processing route: steps S25→S028 to S030)
Returning to the description of step S024 in FIG. 8B, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W (0, 0) corresponding to the backup return transition state (step S024: ≠ W (0, 0)), then It is determined whether the bit pattern is W (0, 1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025). If it is W (0, 1) (step S025:=W (0, 1)), it is determined to be in the "RAM clear transition state (see FIG. 8C)", and the intra-region RAM processing is executed (step S028). . The intra-area RAM processing in step S028 is common to the intra-area RAM processing in step S021. Next, the RAM clear command (BA20H) and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S029), and the fact that the RAM is cleared is notified to the surroundings (including the notification to the hall computer HC). A predetermined notification time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the RAM clear notification timer as the time for clearing (step S030). When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it sets the performance mode to the initial state "normal performance mode", returns the performance state to the initial state, and uses the performance means to generate an error corresponding to the RAM clear. The notification (RAM clear notification effect) is executed for 30 seconds, which is the same as the set time of the notification timer. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, the loudspeaker 16 outputs an alarm sound when the RAM is cleared, and the liquid crystal display 36 displays an effect image such as "RAM is being cleared". In step S029, the RAM clear command and the customer waiting command are transmitted, but at this timing, the customer waiting standby effect is not executed, and after the RAM clear notification is executed for 30 seconds, the customer waiting standby is performed. perform the performance. For example, the alarm sound is faded out, and a customer waiting demo screen or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 . In this embodiment, the RAM clear notification effect (RAM clear notification) is executed with the highest priority.

As already described, in the intra-area RAM initialization processing (steps S021 and S028) according to the present embodiment, the setting value storage area (setting value data) of the intra-area RAM is not initialized, and the setting value data is not initialized. (including clearing of the backup flag BF) are performed in the later-described setting change process (FIG. 11). Therefore, if only this step S028 intra-area RAM initialization processing is executed (this also applies if the setting values are not changed after the initialization in step S021 (if the same settings are changed)), the setting The value remains the same as when the power was cut off last time, but the game is started with the game state and pending data initialized (normal state and initial state such as no pending data). . As a result, for example, if you want to take over only the set values from the previous day's business, you can complete the clearing work by simply turning the RAM clear switch 98 ON/OFF, without having to change the settings, which involves many work steps. There is an advantage.

(Setting confirmation processing execution processing route: Step S24→S026)
On the other hand, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W (0, 1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025:=W (1, 0)), that is, "setting confirmation transition state (see FIG. 8C)" If it is W(1, 0) corresponding to , a setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value is executed (step S026). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing the setting confirmation process, the backup recovery process (step S027) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S032.

As described above, according to the combination of the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door open sensor 61, the "setting change process (step S022)" and the "setting confirmation process (step S026)" are executed. , "Internal RAM clearing process (step S028)", or "Backup restoration process (step S027)" is executed. An operation confirmation timer setting process (FIG. 8D), which will be described later, is executed (step S033), and the contents of all the saved registers are restored (step S034).

(10-2-2. Operation check timer setting process: FIG. 8D)
The processing of the operation confirmation timer setting processing (step S033) will be described. FIG. 8D is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation timer setting process. In this operation check timer setting process, initial setting required for the check operation when the power of the performance indicator 99 is turned on is performed. In this embodiment, as part of the power-on processing, in order to check the operation of the performance indicator 99, after the power is turned on, the four 7-segment LEDs are turned on and off for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). "Operation confirmation display" is performed by periodically repeating turning off and blinking all the lights. The processing (operation confirmation processing) relating to the operation confirmation display of the performance indicator 99 is performed during the performance display monitor processing during the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) described later (step S101 in FIG. 13, FIG. 28 step S833, FIG. 30B).

Here, after a series of power-on processing of steps S011 to S030 is completed, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) is started in step S035. If the timer interrupt processing is started from , the performance display monitor processing will also be executed from the time the power is turned on, and if the operation check timer setting processing is executed blindly, the operation check display will be displayed while checking or changing the settings. will be executed and the operation check will be neglected. In addition, when the power is turned on or after a system reset (when the power is reset), various power-on processes such as setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, and backup restoration processing can be executed. If the timer setting process is executed, the process becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the game start state cannot be adjusted smoothly. Moreover, it may lead to a control burden. Also, in the present embodiment, the time interval of the timer interrupt processing is about 4 ms, but depending on the control program, there is a possibility that the interrupt time interval is about 1 ms, which is an extremely short period of time. If you execute , there is a possibility that the base value will be displayed before the operation confirmation display, and there is a possibility that the operation check will be complicated. Considering these various circumstances, it is preferable to execute the operation confirmation timer setting process at least before the timer interrupt process starts (before step S035). It is more preferable to execute this after finishing the process and before the timer interrupt process of step S035 is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, after a series of power-on processing including setting confirmation processing, backup restoration processing, setting change processing, area RAM clear processing, and the like, timer interrupt processing is started. An operation confirmation timer setting process is performed at a stage prior to the CTC setting process for the .

Returning to the description of FIG. 8D, the CPU 201 first stores the stack pointer specifying the stack area in a predetermined area (step S881). Next, an initial value (for example, 5000 ms) is set to the operation confirmation timer that counts the operation confirmation time of the performance indicator 99 (step S882), and the blinking timer that counts the blinking period of the performance indicator 99 is cleared to zero (blinking timer←0) (step S883). Then, the stack pointer is restored, and the operation confirmation timer setting process is exited.

When the processing of steps S032 to S034 related to operation confirmation is finished, next, CTC setting processing for periodically generating a timer interrupt every 4 ms is performed (step S035). Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller, and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 13 is executed. Details will be described later, but in the main control side timer interrupt processing, input management processing for monitoring the ON/OFF state of switches, LED management processing for controlling LED display, control processing for symbol variation display games, control for winning games Various processes related to the progress of the game, such as processes, are executed.

Next, assuming that the game-startable state is ready, the firing control signal (fire permitting signal ES) is set from the OFF state to the ON state (step S036). Specifically, a firing control signal that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is output to the payout control board 29 . When receiving the firing control signal, the payout control board 29 determines that the firing is permitted, and outputs the firing control signal to the firing control board 28 to permit the firing operation by the firing device 32 . As a result, the shooting operation prohibited state is controlled to the shooting operation permitted state, and the game ball can be shot by the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁In the present embodiment, the payout control board 29 receives a firing control signal from the main control unit 20 and permits the firing operation. Although it is configured to be indirectly sent to the firing control board 28, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the firing control signal from the main control unit 20 may be output directly to the firing control board 28 to permit the firing operation.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the firing control signal is not output before the process of step S035 is executed (during the initial setting process of step S011, the firing permission signal is controlled to the OFF state). (see step S046 in FIG. 9 to be described later)), that is, it is controlled to be in a firing prohibited state. Therefore, for example, when performing a setting change operation, the firing control signal is not output (controlled to the OFF state) until the setting change process (step S022) is completed, and the firing control signal is output after the setting change process is completed. (Control the firing permission signal to ON state), and control to the firing permission state.

Next, a game start command (BA77H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S037). When the performance control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialize operation) at the time of turning on the power for the movable body accessory such as the watch-shaped accessory 80 and the flower-shaped accessory 90 . Then, when a series of power-on processing (S011 to S038: pre-game start processing at power-on) is completed, the game processing (loop processing of steps S038 to S041) relating to normal game progress is performed. The game is controlled in a state in which progress can be made.

Next, with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S038), various random number updating processes are executed (step S039). In this random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, random numbers for special design determination used in symbol lottery, random numbers related to subsidized lottery Random number) used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special pattern judgment, initial value random number for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random number for variation pattern used for selection of variation pattern, etc. Update.

When the various random number updating processes (step S039) are finished, the performance display monitor tabulation division process is executed (step S040). In this performance display monitor aggregate division process, a base value calculation process for displaying on the performance display device 99 is executed.

As already explained, programs and storage areas for processing related to performance display are stored in an external memory (second memory area) different from the internal memory (first memory area) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress. stipulated. Therefore, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer on the inside memory side and sets the stack pointer on the outside memory side.

Next, after executing the out-of-area RAM check processing shown in FIG. 30A, which will be described later, during the performance display monitor processing during the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. , middle start sensor 34a, right start sensor 33a, right lower start sensor 35a, upper large prize-winning sensor 42a, lower large prize-winning sensor 52a, general winning sensor 43a, and OUT monitoring switch 49a. , check whether or not there is a prize in each winning slot, whether or not game balls are discharged, and the like.

When the current game state is normal state, if it is confirmed that one of the winning holes has won, the number of winning balls in the winning hole is added to the number of normal payouts (during normal state Prize ball addition processing), 1 is added to the normal out count and all state out count (out ball count addition processing), and the current count values are updated. However, if winning is not confirmed and input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added only to the number of outs in the normal state and the number of outs in all states, and these count values are updated (normal state out balls number addition processing). On the other hand, if the current game state is not the normal state (if it is any of the probability variable state, the time saving state, or the latent probability state), even if you confirm the winning of one of the winning openings, the number of normal payouts Without adding the number of prize balls, only the number of all outs is added +1, and even if winning is not confirmed and input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, only the number of all outs is added by 1 ( Out ball number addition processing during abnormal state).

Then, a base value is calculated based on the updated normal payout quantity and normal out count, that is, the latest normal payout quantity and normal out count, and the calculated value is stored in the measurement information storage area of the RAM 203. . Whether or not it is in the normal state is determined by whether or not a normal state determination flag (see steps S827 to S828 in the performance display monitor process of FIG. 28), which will be described later, is in the ON state (5AH). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state number YJ managed by the intra-area RAM may be directly acquired and the current game state determined based on the value of YJ.

Here, "during a jackpot game" is basically the same as the normal state, "low accuracy, no power supply", but since it is a game state separate from the normal state, it is important to measure the base value. The number of winning balls in the big winning opening 40 is excluded from the counting (detection information of the upper big winning opening sensor 42a is excluded from the measurement). On the other hand, the normal state includes the small winning game. This is because when a small win is won, there is no internal game state transition control, and the game state during the small win game is continued as it is at the time of winning. Therefore, if the current game state is the normal state, the normal state remains during the small winning game, and the number of prize balls in the lower big winning hole 50 in the normal state is included in the counting target of the base value (lower big winning prize The information detected by the mouth sensor 52a is not excluded from the measurement target). In the case of this embodiment, the big winning openings to be opened are separate for the big win and the small winning. case), in order to exclude the winning of the big winning slot during the big winning game, it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is in the normal state according to the presence or absence of the operation of the condition device. Specifically, if the conditional device is in operation, even if it is confirmed that a prize has been won in the big winning slot, this is excluded from the counting target, and if the conditional device is not in operation (normal state and minor (Applicable during the game) When it is confirmed that a prize has been won in the big winning hole, this may be counted, and the number of prize balls may be added to the number of normal payouts.

Also, from when the power is turned on for the first time or when the RAM outside the area is all cleared until the number of all-state-outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299), only the number of all-state-outs is counted as a test section, and the base value, etc. is counted. is not measured. This is because, when a game machine is installed in a pachinko hall for the first time, as an operation test, for example, a game ball is placed in the starting hole to check the operation, or a trial shot is performed. This is to exclude prize balls and out balls from being measured. Therefore, the initial (first) measurement starts after the end of the test section.

Further, when the number of out-of-all states reaches a predetermined specified number (here, 60,000) after the first (first) measurement is started, the base value at this point (first base value) is displayed in the performance of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the storage area, and the current normal payout quantity, normal out quantity, and all state out quantity are cleared to zero for the second measurement (measurement data initialization processing). That is, each time the specified number of 60,000 is counted, the current base value is stored, and for the next base value measurement, the normal payout count, normal out count, and all state out count during measurement are stored. Clear to zero.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99)
A specific example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 will be described. For example, when the number of out-of-state totals reaches 60,000 and the current base value is '35', when displaying the real-time base value, 4-digit character information (identification display section (identification segment) + "bL.00" is displayed as the base display portion (ratio segment) (the base value is 0 here because of the zero clear by the above-mentioned measurement data initialization processing), and when displaying the history base value, "b6.35" is illuminated.

(during the test section)
In addition, during the test section, when displaying the real-time base value to notify that the current measurement is in the test section, "bL."--" is lit up. When the history base value is to be displayed, "b6."

(First measurement: N = 1)
In addition, since the history base value is not saved at the time of the first measurement, "bL.**"('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed when displaying the real-time base value. When displaying the history base value, "b6.--" is displayed. However, the identification display portion "b6." is flashed to indicate that it is the first measurement.

(When measuring from the next time: N ≥ 2)
In addition, for the next and subsequent measurements (N≧2), the real-time base value varies from after zero clearing for the next measurement until the total number of out-states reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6000). When the real-time base value is displayed as , the identification display section flashes "bL." When displaying the history base value, "b6.**"('**' is the previous base value) is displayed. However, in the case of the first time (N=1), the history base value is not saved, so when displaying the history base value, "b6.--" is displayed, but "b6." is displayed blinking.

When the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S041) is completed, the interrupt permission state is set (step S042), the process returns to step S039, and thereafter the processes of steps S039 to S042 are repeated (main loop process). . The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number updating processes and performance display monitor tallying and dividing processes, except during timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

(10-1. Initial Setting Processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the initial setting process (step S011) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the initial setting process.

In FIG. 9, when a system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state (step S043) and sets a stack pointer (step S044) as an initial setting at startup. Next, in preparation for use of the stack in the first power failure check process, the protected and prohibited areas of the RAM are invalidated (S045). RAM protection is a function to prevent rewriting of RAM due to malfunction or erroneous operation. The operation of RAM protection is as follows. After a system reset or WDT reset occurs, RAM protection is valid (RAM protection state). When RAM protection is enabled, data can be read from the RAM, but data cannot be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to the RAM, it is necessary to set RAM protection to invalid. In addition, when the prohibited area is valid, if there is an access to a preset address range (for example, a program related to the change setting of set values), the IAT generation signal will is output and an IAT reset occurs (function for prohibiting traveling outside the designated area (IAT function)), but this IAT reset does not occur if the setting of the prohibited area is invalidated. When an IAT reset occurs, only the CPU core is reset and internal functions are not reset. However, when a system reset or WDT reset occurs, all internal functions including the CPU core are reset. In other words, even if an IAT reset occurs, the RAM is not protected and the CTC and WDT are not initialized. are set, and CTC and WDT are initialized. However, even if any one of the system reset, WDT reset, and IAT reset is performed, the contents stored in the RAM do not change. Note that when an IAT reset occurs, the system may be reset assuming that an unauthorized program has been executed.

Next, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off and on during the setting change process described later, the security signal output from the frame external terminal board 21 is turned off, and the set value to the setting display 97 is set. In order to clear the display data related to the display, and to prevent the unintentional output of the firing control signal (fire permitting signal), the firing permitting signal is also set to the OFF state (step 046).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10A) is executed (step S047). This first power failure check process is the same process as step S019 already described.

Then, various initial setting processes are executed (step S048). Here, setting processing for initializing register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, interrupt mode setting processing for setting a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), interrupt priority setting processing, internal hard random number Executes various setting processes when the power is turned on, such as internal hard random number setting process that activates the circuit.

Next, the activation waiting time of the sub-control board (production control section 24) is set (step S049). Then, until the sub-board start-up waiting time elapses (step S052:=0), the subtraction process of the sub-board start-up waiting time (sub-board start-up waiting time -1) (step S050) and the first power supply abnormality check process (step S051) ) is repeatedly executed (step S052: ≠0). With the lapse of this sub-board activation waiting time, activation of the effect control section 24 is completed.

When the sub board startup waiting time has elapsed (step S052:=0), a standby screen display command (BA01H) is transmitted to the effect control section 24 (step S053). When a performance control part 24 receives a standby screen display command, a performance means is used to display standby performance at power-on. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an effect image such as "Please Wait".

Next, while executing the first power supply abnormality check process (step S054), it waits for a power-on signal from the payout control board 29 to be sent (steps S054 to S055). This power-on signal is a signal output when the payout control board 29 normally starts up, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. As a result, when the payout control board 29 does not function normally due to some kind of trouble, the processing of steps S054 to S055 is repeated and the game operation is not started. Then, when the power-on signal is confirmed (step S055: ON), this initialization process is exited, and the process of step S012 of the main control side main process of FIG. 8A is executed.

(10-3. Setting Change Processing: Fig. 11)
Next, the setting change process (step S024) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process. This process is executed when the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door open sensor 61 are all ON (in the case of W(1, 1, 1)). .

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first executes input data creation processing (step S901). In this input data creation process, the input information of the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, the setting key switch 95, etc. is obtained. It's like

Next, the setting value Nc (current setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is obtained (in this embodiment, the value of the setting value data is obtained in a predetermined register as a setting work value). , set value Nc is a normal value (one of 00H to 05H) (step S903). If the acquired set value Nc is not a value of 00H to 05H (if it is not a normal value), that is, if the acquired set value Nc does not correspond to any of the set values 1 to 6 (step S903: NO) , the setting value data is initialized assuming that an abnormality (RAM abnormality) has occurred in the setting value data (step S904). Here, 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 is set to the setting value Nc (setting work value) (setting value Nc←00H).

If the setting value Nc is a normal value (step S903: YES), or after executing the initialization processing (setting value Nc←00H) for the setting value data in step S904, then A first power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S905).

Next, a security signal is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906), and then a chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, while performing subtraction processing of the chattering prevention waiting time (step S908), it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S909: NO). In the setting change process of this embodiment, the processes of steps S905 to S916 are repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (step S916: YES). , it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 95 has changed from OFF to ON. By providing a chattering prevention waiting time in steps S907 to S909, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented. .

If the chattering prevention waiting time becomes 0 (step S909: YES), an input data creation process is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not there is a setting change operation is checked. is determined (step S911). In this embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. Note that in this embodiment, the input data creation process for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only in step S910 immediately before step S911 but also in step S901 at the start of the setting change process. This means that even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 suddenly rises when the setting change process is started while the setting change switch 95 is being pressed down, it can be detected as empty in step S910. This is so as not to affect the determination processing in step S911.

If the setting change switch 95 is not ON (step S911: NO), it is determined that no setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, if the setting change switch 95 is ON (step S911: NO), it is assumed that there has been a setting change operation, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) (step S912). As already described, the set value at the time of change operation is switched so as to circulate within the range of settings 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated. When the process of step S912 is finished, it is determined again whether or not the set value data is a normal value (step S913). 00H (setting 1) corresponding to is set (setting value Nc←00H) (step S914).

Next, based on the current set value Nc, setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current set value during the setting change operation. Note that the setting value displayed during the setting change operation does not indicate the current setting information (value of the setting value data in the setting value storage area), but indicates a provisional setting value before the setting is fixed.

After completing the processing of step S915, it is determined whether or not the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the setting change operation is completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation has not been completed, and the process proceeds to step S905. to repeat the processing of step S916.

If the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (step S916: YES), the current setting value Nc (the setting work value held in the register) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 assuming that the setting value is confirmed. Together with this (step S917), a set value confirmation display process is executed (step S918). In this setting value confirmation display process, the current setting display data is cleared and the setting confirmation LED lighting display data is output. The DP (decimal point) portion of the setting indicator 97, which is a 7-segment LED, functions as the setting confirmation LED of the present embodiment. , the DP part lights up to notify that the set value has been determined.

Next, the backup flag BF is cleared (step S919), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S920), and a setting change completion command (BA09H) is transmitted to the effect control section 24 (step S921). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change completion command, the effect during setting change being executed is ended, and the setting change completion effect is executed for a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds). For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, the speaker 16 outputs a setting change completion sound (such as "The setting has been changed♪"), and the liquid crystal display device 36 reads "The setting has been changed." to display the effect image (setting change completion screen). It should be noted that when the setting change operation is performed, the area RAM clearing process (step S021 in FIG. 8A) is executed, so instead of the setting change completion effect, an error notification corresponding to the RAM clear (RAM clear notification effect) is displayed. you can go For example, the setting change completion effect may be the same effect as the RAM clear notification effect (the error notification effect when the RAM clearing process in the area of step S028 is executed). Also, the RAM clear notification effect and the setting change completion effect may be performed in an overlapping manner. For example, it is possible to simultaneously display on the liquid crystal display device 36 a display such as "The setting has been changed" and "The RAM is being cleared".

Then, it waits until the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (step S922: NO), and if it is confirmed that the setting key switch 94 is OFF (step S922: YES), the setting confirmation LED (DP section) is extinguished. , exits the setting change process. This completes a series of setting change operations. In this embodiment, the setting change completion effect is displayed for a predetermined time (30 seconds) regardless of whether the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. After that, it returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 8A, and transmits a customer waiting command to the production control unit 24 (step S023).

After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the front frame 2 is simply opened. Therefore, if a door opening error can be notified in the processing when the power is turned on (at least before entering the loop processing of S038 to S041), the door opening error notification (for example, , the decoration lamp 45 is all flashing in red, and the speaker 16 outputs a door open alarm sound). This is because it is preferable to notify the setting change completion effect with priority over the door open error in order to notify that a new set value has been selected and determined (including changing to the same set value). . In addition, since the setting change completion effect notifies that the setting change operation has been completed (that the setting value has been changed), it should not be confused with the door opening error notification or the setting change effect, so that it is different from these effects. A mode (notification mode) is preferable.

By the way, after the setting change operation is completed, a waiting-for-customer command is transmitted following the setting change completion command (step S921, step S023 in FIG. 8A), but the effect control unit 24 ends the setting change completion effect. The customer waiting waiting effect (customer waiting demo screen etc.) is not executed until it is done. In the case of this embodiment, after the setting change completion effect is completed, the normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the background image of the normal effect mode corresponding to the normal state is displayed, and the decorative pattern is When a specific combination of symbols (for example, "7", "3", "1") is displayed, and a predetermined time has passed since this display state without winning a prize at the starting gate or the like, and the game has not started. (For example, after 180 seconds have elapsed), a customer waiting waiting effect (customer waiting demo screen) is executed.

Although the dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98 may be configured to be usable as a setting change switch. In this embodiment, the dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided, but the setting key switch 94 may be configured to be usable as a setting change completion switch. In this case, the process of step S922 may not be provided, leading to a reduction in the control load. In addition, sensors that detect game balls (for example, sensors 33a, 34a, 35a, 42a, 52a, 43a, or 49a) may function as setting change completion switches. In this case, in the determination process of step S916, it may be determined that the set value has been determined when the sensor detects the game ball (ON state) by, for example, cleaning the game ball in the winning opening. .

(10-4. Setting Confirmation Processing: Fig. 12)
Next, the setting confirmation process (step S026) in FIG. 8B will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process. This processing is executed when the setting key switch 94 of the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 is in the ON state of the setting confirmation transition state (in the case of W(1, 0)).

In FIG. 12 , the CPU 201 first transmits a setting confirmation command (E021H) to the effect control section 24 . When the production control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation command, the production means is used to execute the setting confirmation production (step S931). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as "Confirming settings". By the way, when confirming the setting value, the front frame 2 is first opened, and then the setting key switch 94 is turned ON (ON state). Here, when the door opening error is configured to be notified, the door opening error notification occurs prior to the effect during setting confirmation. On the other hand, to end the confirmation of the set values, conversely, the setting key switch 94 is first turned OFF (OFF state), and then the front frame 2 is closed (even if the setting confirmation is completed, the front frame 2 is closed). Door open error occurs until 2 is closed). In other words, a door open error occurs in any case from the start of confirmation of the set value to the completion of the confirmation. Therefore, the notification priority of the setting confirmation effect is set higher than the door opening error notification, and only the setting confirmation effect appears while the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state, and again after the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. , the door open error may appear. Of course, in order to clarify the fact that the door opening error and the fact that the setting confirmation work is in progress, the fact that the setting confirmation is in progress and the fact that the door is being opened may be reported redundantly.

Next, set value data is obtained from the set value storage area of the RAM 203 (step S932).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10A) is executed (step S933), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state (step S934). When the setting key switch 94 is ON, the setting is being checked. In this case (step S934: YES), a security signal is output (step S935), setting value data is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and setting display data is created based on the setting value data (step S936), and outputs the setting display data (step S937). As a result, the current setting value (here, the setting value being finalized, unlike the setting change process) is displayed on the setting display 99 . After that, the processing of steps S933 to S937 is repeatedly executed until the setting key switch 94 is turned off, that is, until the setting confirmation is completed.

When the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S934: NO), the setting display data is cleared and the setting value displayed on the setting display 99 is displayed as the setting confirmation end processing. Along with turning off the light (step S938), output of the security signal is stopped (step S939), and a setting confirmation end command (E022H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S940). When the performance control part 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the performance during setting confirmation is terminated. This completes a series of setting confirmation periods.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 13>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 13, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, as shown in FIG. 10B, the level of power supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the game can be resumed without hindrance when the power supply is restored. In order to prevent this, a backup process or the like is performed to store predetermined game information in the RAM at the time of power failure. Therefore, the power failure check process functions as backup means. Details of the second power supply abnormality check process will be described later.

Next, switch input data creation processing is executed (step S082). Input data is created based on input information (ON/OFF signals and rising states (ON edge, OFF edge)) from various sensors and switches. The information detected by various sensors here includes, for example, winning detection switches (right starting opening sensor 33a, middle starting opening sensor 34a, lower right starting opening sensor 35a, normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, upper large winning opening sensor 42a, ON/OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal output from the lower special winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, the OUT monitoring switch 49a, and the gate sensor 57a, etc., and the switch related to the setting change operation (Setting key switch 94, setting change switch 95, setting change completion switch 96, etc.) ON / OFF information (operation information) of switch signals output from, state signals from payout control board 29 (door open sensor 61, full ON/OFF information of the detection sensor 60) and the like.

Then, error management processing is executed (step S083). In this error management process, based on input data related to various sensors and status signals from the payout control board 29, it is monitored whether an error has occurred, and if an error has occurred, error processing according to the error type to run. Error processing includes transmission of an error command according to the error type, transmission of an error cancellation command when the error is resolved, and the like. When receiving an error command, the performance control unit 24 executes error notification according to the error type, and when receiving an error release command, terminates the error notification being executed.

Next, a timer management process for managing the timer used for game operation control is executed (step S084). Timer values of various timers (for example, a special symbol role product operation timer to be described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are updated (subtraction processing) here. The details of this timer management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a timer interrupt random number management process for periodically updating the random numbers for each variable display game is executed (step S085). Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, for the random number for special symbol judgment and the random number for auxiliary hit judgment, update the random number (add +1 for each interrupt), and Then, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Since the random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit) is generated by the random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

In the input management process of step S089, based on the input data created in the switch input data creation process (step S082), a winning counter is provided for each winning opening to count the number of winnings and an OUT ball monitor to count the number of out balls. Update counter values, etc.

Next, a prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this winning ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command designating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29 . When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Then, normal design management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, a process necessary for executing the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary hit determination) necessary for the auxiliary winning lottery is generated. Acquire (general pattern random number acquisition processing), hold and store the maximum number of reserved balls up to the upper limit with the game information as the reserved data (operation reserved ball related to normal pattern (normal pattern operation reserved ball)) (normal pattern reservation memory processing) . Then, when the predetermined fluctuation display start condition regarding the normal pattern is established, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the normal pattern operation reserved ball is performed, and the selection of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the auxiliary winning lottery result and the stop display mode of the normal pattern. (Normal stop design) is determined. Also here, in order to operate the variable display of the normal pattern, if it is in the process of generating LED display data for variable display, if it is not in process of generating LED display data for stop display (normal pattern display data update process).

Next, a normal electric accessary product management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessary product management process, a process necessary for executing the normal electric open game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, a process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100, which will be described later, thereby controlling the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable piece 47. be done.

Next, special symbol management processes 1 and 2 are executed (steps S093 and S094). In these special symbol management processes 1 and 2, mainly, processes necessary for executing the special symbol variation display game are performed. Details of the special symbol management process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and details of the special symbol management process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a special electric accessary product management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessary product management process, the process necessary for controlling the execution of the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the big win lottery result is a big win 1 to 8 or a small win, the execution of the winning game (big win game or small win game) corresponding to the winning type is controlled. In the case of a big hit, round game start processing based on the detection signal of the combination gate sensor 57a, round game execution control, game state transition control after the end of the big win game, and the like are included.

Moreover, here, according to the progress of the winning game, a plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted. In the case of a big hit, a "jack start command" is issued at the start of the big win game, and a "round start command" is issued at the start of the round game (when the game ball passes through the gate 57 for the 1st round, and when the big winning opening is opened after the 2nd round). command", at the end of each round game (when the big winning mouth is closed), "round end command", at the end of the specified number of rounds (at the end of the final round game), "jack end command", at the time of winning the big winning mouth A "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. - 特許庁In addition, in the case of a small win, a "small win start command" is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 when the small win game is started, and a "small win end command" is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 when the small win game is finished. The effect control unit 24 receives these commands and controls the appearance of the target effect (hit effect) according to the progress of the winning game.

For example, the jackpot start command includes information about the type of the hit this time and the game state when the hit is won. It is used when determining a series of hit performance scenarios to be developed during the big win game. In addition, the round start command includes the current round number information, which is used when the presentation control section 24 side presents an presentation corresponding to the number of rounds. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information about the type of winning this time and the game state at the time of the winning, and the performance control unit 24 side starts the ending performance and specifies the game state after the winning game ends. It is used when determining the production mode after the winning game.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends (in this embodiment, when the ending effect period ends (the same applies to the small winning game)), the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter (the number of rounds Counter to count), special symbol stop 1 flag, etc. are cleared. Further, when the small winning game is completed, a small winning medium flag, a special symbol stop 2 flag, etc., which will be described later, are cleared.

Next, a right hitting notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, when it is under the "right-handed advantageous" game state (during the winning game, latent probability state, time saving state, probability variable state) LED for lighting the right-handed display device 39b Data is created, and in the case of a "left-handed advantageous" game state (normal state), LED data for extinguishing the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, an LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management processing, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right-handed display device 39b is performed. A control signal based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), the special symbol management process (step S093), etc., is output in this LED management process. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of special symbols and normal symbols are realized.

Next, an external terminal management process is performed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various kinds of outer end signals including a jackpot medium signal and a variable-short time jackpot medium signal are generated through the frame external terminal board 21, and sent to external devices such as the data counter DT and the hall computer HC. output control.

Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c, the big winning opening solenoid 42c, It controls the output of the excitation signal to 52c and the like. As a result, opening and closing operations of the movable piece 47 and the big winning openings 40 and 50 are realized.

Next, performance display monitor processing is executed (step S101). In this performance display monitor processing, processing necessary for displaying performance information on the performance indicator 99 is performed. Details of the performance display monitor process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S102). This resets the WDT and returns the count value to the initial value.

After completing the above steps S081 to S102, the interrupt permission state is set (step S103). As a result, the timer interrupt processing is ended, the main control side main processing before the interrupt is performed, and the main control side main processing is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10B. Second power supply abnormality check process: FIG. 10B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10B, the second power failure check process (step S081) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 10B is a flow chart showing the second power supply abnormality check process.

In FIG. 13B, the CPU 201 first acquires a power failure signal (voltage drop signal) supplied from a power supply board (not shown) through an input port (not shown) (step S951). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power failure signal match twice consecutively (step S952), and the processing of steps S951 to S952 is repeated until they match (step S952: NO). If the levels of the power failure signal match (step S952: YES), it is determined whether the power failure signal is at an abnormal level (step S953).

If the power failure signal is not at the abnormal level (step S953: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S956), the value of the power failure confirmation counter is cleared (step S957), and the second power failure check process is exited.

On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S953: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S954), and whether the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after the addition has reached the upper limit value Y It is determined whether or not (step S955). This is because the acquired data from the input port may be garbled due to the influence of noise, etc., and the acquired data continuously maintains the abnormal level and the upper limit value Y (for example, , Y=2), it is determined that the AC power supply has actually been cut off.

If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter has reached the upper limit value Y (step S955: YES), backup processing is performed assuming that a power supply abnormality has occurred. Specifically, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared to zero (step S958), the firing control signal is set to OFF (step S959), and the backup flag BF is set to ON (5AH) (step S960). Then, a power-off command indicating that a power failure has occurred is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S961). The power-off command is composed of a power-off A command and a power-off B command each of 16-bit length, and is continuously transmitted every 8 bits in this order. The reason for adopting such a configuration is to prevent erroneous notification of the power failure situation to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

Next, the RAM protection is enabled and the prohibited area is disabled (step S962), and the output data of all output ports are cleared (step S963). This prohibits data from being written to the RAM in subsequent processing. This prevents the RAM from being abnormally rewritten due to the reading of an illegal address in the RAM due to the voltage drop, and the payout control board 29 that starts the same kind of power supply abnormality check processing later than the main control unit 20. In contrast, irrational data can be prevented from being sent. After the above backup processing is completed, the generation of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting processing for the CTC, and the CPU is set to be interrupt disabled (step S964). Wait for the CPU to become inactive.

<14. Timer Management Processing: FIG. 14>
Next, the timer management process (step S084) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of timer management processing.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first performs subtraction processing (timer update processing) of the 2-byte timer (step S531).

In this embodiment, as a 2-byte timer, a normal symbol electric accessory operation timer that manages the operation time of the normal variable winning device 41 (movable piece 47), a normal symbol electric accessory operation timer for model test (normal electric accessory for test signal Role product in operation timer), special symbol 1 operation timer 2 that manages the fixed display time of special symbol 1, special symbol 2 operation timer 2 that manages the fixed display time of special symbol 2, special variable winning device 42, 52 (open It deals with a special electric accessory operation timer that manages the operation time of the doors 42b, 52b), an error timer that manages a predetermined error notification time, and the like. Here, it is checked whether the timer values of these 2-byte timers are zero or not, and if there is a timer that is not zero, the timer value is subtracted by one.

Next, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S532). This "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is a timer that manages the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2, and consists of 3 bytes (3-byte timer). As a timer having the same 3-byte configuration as the special symbol 2 operation timer 1, a "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" for managing the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is provided. In this embodiment, a super long variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (600000 ms) is adopted as a variation pattern related to special symbols that cannot be measured by a 2-byte timer. For this reason, a 3-byte timer is used as a timer for managing the fluctuation time of special symbols. The variation time is set at step SS457 during special symbol variation pattern creation processing in FIG. 22 (step S417 during special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 18).

Next, it is determined whether or not the obtained special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533). If the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533:=0), the process proceeds to step S535, and if the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S533: ≠0), the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is subtracted by 1 (step S534).

(Special figure 1 fluctuation time measurement interruption processing at the time of special figure 2 small hit winning: S535 to S538)
Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop 2 flag is ON (5AH) (step S535). This "special symbol stop 2 flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the special symbol is "a small winning symbol is stopped and a small winning game is in progress", and the flag is ON (=5AH). In this case, it indicates that "small winning symbols are stopped and small winning games are in progress", and if the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that "small winning symbols are stopped and small winning games are in progress". (See, for example, steps S483 to S484 in FIG. 24 described later). Here, during the ON state period of the special symbol stop 2 flag, the fixed display time (500 ms) is set after the special symbol fluctuation time ends and the symbol display mode (small winning symbol) corresponding to the small winning is stopped and displayed. It refers to the period until the end of the small hit game. The special symbol stop 2 flag is cleared ((special symbol stop 2 flag ← 00H) at the end of the small hit game in the above-described special electric role product management process (step S095). However, the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the OFF state. Even so, until the variable display of the special symbols is newly started, the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device.However, in this case, the special symbol stop 2 flag is OFF. In this way, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is determined display time (between 500 ms after the end of the fluctuation time) to during the small winning game In terms of whether it is a game period or not, it is referred to as "stopping the small winning symbols and playing the small winning game".Hereinafter, stopping the small winning symbols and during the playing of the small winning symbols will be abbreviated as "stopping the small winning symbols". In the case of this embodiment, the small hit is a big hit lottery target type only on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 4), but it is the same when the small hit is provided on the special figure 1 side.

Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the special symbol stop 2 flag described above, a "special symbol stop 1 flag" is used as a flag for designating whether or not the jackpot is in progress. It is a flag for designating whether or not the special symbol is ``stopping the jackpot symbols and playing the jackpot'', and when the flag is ON (=5AH), it is ``stopping the jackpot symbols and playing the jackpot''. When the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that it is not "the jackpot symbols are stopped and the jackpot game is in progress" (for example, see steps S493-S494 in FIG. 25 described later). Here, during the ON state period of the special symbol stop 1 flag, after the special symbol fluctuation time ends and the symbol display mode (big hit symbol) corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed, a fixed display time (500 ms) passes through, It refers to the period until the jackpot game ends. Similar to the above-described "special symbol stop 2 flag", this "special symbol stop 1 flag" is also cleared at the end of the jackpot game in the special electric auditors management process (step S095) (after the end of the specified number of rounds) , Cleared at the end of the ending production time: special symbol stop 1 flag ← 00H). However, even if the special symbol stop 1 flag is turned off, the big hit symbol remains stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device until the variable display of the special symbol is newly started. However, in this case, since the special symbol stop 1 flag is in the OFF state, it is treated as a big hit symbol non-stop. In this way, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag is called "during the big win symbol stop and big win game" in terms of whether it is the game period between the fixed display time and the big win game. In the following, the big-hit symbol stop and the big-hit game are abbreviated as "during the big-hit symbol stop".

When the special symbol stop 2 flag is ON (5AH) (step S535:=5AH), the timer management process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol stop 2 flag is not ON (5AH) (step S535: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S536), and whether the acquired special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero It is determined whether or not (step S537). The special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is a 3-byte timer that manages the variation time of the special symbol 1, as described above.

If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero (step S537:=0), the timer management process is exited without doing anything. If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S537: ≠0), 1 is subtracted from the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 to update the timer value (step S538), and the timer management process is exited.

In this embodiment, in the determination process of step S535, when the special symbol stop 2 flag is ON (5AH) (step S535:=5AH), that is, when the small hit is in progress, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 The timer management process is exited without performing the timer subtraction process for . Therefore, during the period when the ON state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is maintained, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and the fluctuation display state is maintained without the special figure 1 being stopped and displayed (during the measurement interruption , and treated as 'fluctuation display'). As a result, a simultaneous variation type game machine of "measurement interruption type at the time of small hit" is realized. In this embodiment, when one of the special symbols is a big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced losing symbol, so during the big hit game, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 or the special symbol 2 operation timer is displayed. No timer decrement (update) processing for 1 is provided.

<15. Special Symbol Management Processing 1: Fig. 15>
Next, the special symbol management process 1 (step S093) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol management process 1. As shown in FIG.

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the processing contents of the special symbol management process 1, first, regarding the special symbol operation confirmation data in the figure, the special symbol operation status (special symbol 1 operation status, special symbol 2 operation status) I'll explain.

"Special symbol operation confirmation data" is data that designates the special symbol type to be processed in each process in the special symbol management processes 1 and 2 (steps S093 and S094), and the special symbol operation confirmation data is " If it is zero (00H)", specify "Special Figure 1" as the processing target, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is "1 (01H)", specify "Special Figure 2" as the processing target. . The value of the special symbol operation confirmation data is changed to 00H and 01H according to the processing state (see steps S301 and S306).

Also, what is the "special pattern operation status"? It is a status value that specifies the behavior of special symbols, and this status value is changed according to the processing state. In this embodiment, a "special symbol 1 operation status" indicating the behavior of the special figure 1 and a "special symbol 2 operation status" indicating the behavior of the special figure 2 are provided. In the special symbol operation status, four status values of "waiting for customers (00H)", "waiting (01H)", "changing (02H)", and "determining (03H)" are shown as status values indicating the behavior of special symbols. are provided. The above "waiting for customers (00H)" and "waiting (01H)" indicate that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and "during fluctuation" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing The above "determined" means that the special symbols are stopped (determined) and displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time).

Here, (α) the processing of steps S304 and S309 (processing during special symbol fluctuation), (β) processing of steps S305 and S310 (processing during special symbol confirmation time), (γ) step S331 shown in FIG. 16 to be described later. and the processing of step S334 (special symbol variation start processing) are configured as common processing, respectively, in order to reduce the control burden. In this embodiment, the special symbol operation confirmation data, the special symbol operation status, etc. are well linked, and the following control is performed regarding the variable display operation control of the special symbol.

(Processing in the first half of FIG. 15 (processing on the special figure 1 side): steps S301 to S305)
In the process of steps S301 to S305 in the first half shown in FIG. 15, as a process for realizing the variable display operation of special figure 1, first update (set) the special symbol operation confirmation data to 00H and set "special figure 1". After designating as a processing target (step S301), when the special symbol 1 operation status is "fluctuating (02H)", "special symbol fluctuating process (step S304)" is executed, and "fixing (03H) ', the 'special symbol confirmation time process (step S305)' is executed.

Also, during the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, if the fluctuation start allowable condition is satisfied, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 00H, and after specifying "special symbol 1" as a processing target (step S329) , When the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S331)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

(Processing in the second half (processing on the special figure 2 side): steps S306 to S310)
In the process of steps S306 to S310 in the second half shown in FIG. 15, as a process for realizing the variable display operation of special figure 2, first update the special symbol operation confirmation data to 01H and set "special figure 2" as the processing object. After specifying (step S306), if the special symbol 2 operation status is "fluctuating (02H)", "special symbol fluctuating process (step S309)" is executed, and "fixed (03H)" In this case, "special symbol confirmation time processing (step S310)" is executed. Then, the special symbol management process 1 is exited, and the special symbol management process 2 of step S094 in FIG. 13 is performed.

Also, in the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, when the fluctuation start allowable condition is satisfied, after updating the special symbol operation confirmation data to 01H and designating "special symbol 2" as the processing target (step S332) , When the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S334)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

The details of the special symbol variation start processing (steps S331, S334) are shown in FIG. 18, and the details of the special symbol variation process (steps S304, S309) are shown in FIGS. Details of the intermediate processing (steps S305 and S310) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26A and 26B.

<16. Special Symbol Management Processing 2: Fig. 16>
Next, the special symbol management process 2 (step S094) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol management process 2. As shown in FIG. This special symbol management process 2 mainly includes processing related to pending storage when a game ball wins in the starting port, starting port check processing related to pre-reading notice (holding addition command), and special symbol fluctuation related to the start of special symbol fluctuation. It is mainly composed of start processing.

In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not there is a prize to the right start opening 33 which is the special figure 1 start opening, the middle start opening 34 which is the special figure 1 start opening, and the lower right start opening 35 which is the special figure 2 start opening. are sequentially checked (steps S321, S323, S325).

If there is a winning at the right starting gate 33 (step S321: YES), the right starting gate check process is executed (step S322), and if there is a winning at the middle starting gate 34 (step S323: YES), the middle starting gate A check process is executed (step S324), and if there is a winning at the lower right start opening 35 (step S325: YES), a lower right start opening check process is executed (step S326). Details of the "right start opening check process" in step S322, the "middle start opening check process" in step S324, and the "lower right start opening check process" in step S326 will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the "right start opening check process" of step S322 and the "middle start opening check process" of step S324 which treats special figure 1 as a processing object are common processes.

After completing the processing of steps S321 to S326, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag and the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag are sequentially determined (steps S327 to S328).

If neither the special symbol stop 1 flag nor the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S327: ≠ 5AH and S328: ≠ 5AH), that is, even if the special symbols 1 and 2 are stopped in the small winning symbols If the jackpot pattern is not stopped, it is assumed that the new special pattern fluctuation start permitting condition (execution condition) is established, and the necessary processing for starting the special pattern fluctuation display in steps S329 to S334 is executed. It should be noted that steps S329 ~ S331 is processing for the special figure 1, and steps S332 ~ S334 are processing for the special figure 2.

On the other hand, if either the special symbol stop 1 flag or the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (step S327:=5AH or S328:=5AH), the new special symbol fluctuation start permissive condition is not established. , the special symbol display data update process of step S335, which will be described later, is executed without executing the process related to the start of the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation start process), and the special symbol management process 2 is exited.

In this embodiment, by the processing of steps S327-S328, when the fluctuation time of one special symbol ends and the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, from the start of the fixed display time to the end of the winning game, the other It is possible to prohibit the start of the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the variable display of the other special symbol is not started during the fixed display time of the winning symbol, and the variable display operation of the other special symbol is started even though the winning symbol is stopped. It is possible to reliably prevent an inappropriate display state (display operation) in which an image is displayed. After the winning game is finished, the special symbol stop 1 flag or special symbol stop 2 flag in the ON state is cleared, and the start of the variable display of new special symbols is allowed.

Next, 00H is set to the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S329), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)" (step S330). If the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)" (step S330: YES), the special symbol variation start process is executed (step S331), and if the special symbol 1 operation status is not on standby ( Step S330: NO), the process proceeds to step S332. In the special symbol variation start process, the process necessary for starting the variation display of the special figure 1 is executed. The details of the special symbol variation management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, 01H is set to the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting (00H or 01H)" (step S333). If the special symbol 2 operation status is waiting (00H or 01H) (step S333: YES), the special symbol variation start process is executed (step S334), and if the special symbol 2 operation status is not waiting (step S333 : NO), and proceeds to step S335. In the special symbol variation start process, the process necessary for starting the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that step S331 and step S334 (special symbol variation start processing) are common processing.

When proceeding to the process of step S335, the special symbol display data update process is executed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. Data for display) is created, and if the special symbols are not fluctuating, data for stop display (data for display during special symbol stop display) is created. A control signal based on the display data of the special design created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. . As a result, the special symbol management process 2 is exited, and the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 in FIG. 13 is performed.

<17. Start opening check processing (lower right start opening check processing, right start opening check processing, middle start opening check processing: Fig. 17>
Next, the lower right start opening check process, the right start opening check process, and the middle start opening check process (steps S322, S324, S326) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the starting port check process. These starting port check processes play a role of prize winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition.

Here, the lower right start opening check process (step S326) is a process for the special figure 2 (symbol variation display game 2), and the right start opening check process (step S322) and the middle start opening check (step S324) ) is a process for special figure 1 (symbol variation display game 1). However, in both cases, the processing contents are substantially the same except that the special symbol types to be processed are different. Therefore, in FIG. 17, the start opening check processing (right start opening check processing, middle start opening check processing) for the special figure 1 will be described as a representative, and the start opening check processing for the special figure 2 will be described. A detailed description of (lower right start port check processing) will be omitted to avoid redundant description unless particularly necessary.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first updates the special symbol operation confirmation data to 00H (special symbol operation confirmation data ← 00H) and designates the processing object as the special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is the maximum number of pending storage (here, the upper limit is 4) (step S351). In addition, in the lower right start opening check process of step S322, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 01H (special symbol operation confirmation data + 1) After specifying the processing target to special figure 2, special figure 2 operation reservation ball It is determined whether or not the number is the maximum reserved storage number (here, the upper limit is 4). As described above, below, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 side will be explained.

When the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is the maximum number of pending storage (step S351:=MAX), the process of step S363 described later (command transmission process for over winning prize) is executed, and the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is not the maximum retention memory number (less than 4) (step S351: ≠ MAX), add 1 to the special figure 1 operation retention ball number (step S352).

Next, various random numbers to be used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball generated this time are obtained (step S353). Specifically, from various random number counters, the current values of the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special symbol, and the random number for the variation pattern are acquired, and the acquired random number is stored in the reserve storage area of the RAM 203 . This reserve storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as actuation reserve balls (hold data). Until the symbol 1 variable display operation is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are reserved and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are satisfied (in the order of winning). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of reserved memories: n=4 in this embodiment), each of which stores reserved data corresponding to the maximum number of reserved memories. It is possible.

Next, prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting prefetching determination (prohibiting prefetching notice) is obtained as "winning command data 1" on the lower byte side (EVENT) of the pending addition command (step S354). Next, it is determined whether or not the "prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S355). The above-mentioned "look-ahead prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination for the operation pending ball. Here, since the special figure 1 side is the target of processing, it is determined whether or not the prefetching prohibition condition (special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition) for the special figure 1 operation reservation ball is established.

If the prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied (step S355: YES), the processing of steps S358 to S359 regarding the prefetching determination is skipped, and the prefetching determination for this special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed, and the prefetching A pending addition command with prohibited data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (see step S360 described later). As a result, the look-ahead foretelling effect is not executed either. In other words, the prefetching prohibition data can be said to be data specifying that the prefetching determination process (step S358) is not executed.

Regarding the prefetching prohibition condition, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current game state. Specifically, in the case of the normal state and probability variable state with a high winning frequency to the special figure 1 start port, the prefetching judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the prefetching judgment on the special figure 1 side is allowed, and the special figure 2 start In the latent certainty state where the winning frequency to the mouth 35 is high, the prefetching determination on the special figure 1 side is prohibited and the prefetching determination on the special figure 2 side is allowed. Further, during the time saving state and the jackpot game, the prefetch determination of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is prohibited. The reason why pre-reading is prohibited in the case of the time saving state is that the winning to the special figure 1 start opening occurs frequently during the time saving state, but the high-speed fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation 1 s during time saving" is selected for the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. ((b) in FIG. 35), it is meaningless to generate a pre-reading notice. For this reason, during the time saving state, the pre-reading determination of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is prohibited.

Returning to the description of step S355, when the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S355: NO), the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S356).

<27. Setting error check process: FIG. 27>
For convenience of explanation, the setting abnormality check process will be explained first. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing details of the setting abnormality check process in step S356.

In the setting error check process of FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting error flag is ON (=5AH: setting error) (step S061). If the setting error flag is ON (step S062:=5AH), the setting error check process is exited without doing anything. However, if the setting error flag is not ON (step S062: ≠5AH), the setting value is obtained from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and the setting value is a normal value (00H to 05H corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6). any value) (step S062). This determination processing is the same as the determination processing in steps S903 and S913 during the setting change processing in FIG. 11, and is common processing. If the acquired setting value is not any value between 00H and 05H (step S062: NO), it is determined that an abnormality (setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality)) has occurred in the setting value data, and the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH ) (step S063). Then, a setting value abnormality command (0E33H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S064), and the setting abnormality check process is exited. note that. When the production control part 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the production means is used to execute the setting abnormality error notification. For example, all the decoration lamps 45 are turned on in red, and a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call the person in charge" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. It should be noted that the abnormal setting error (RAM error) can be resolved by performing a setting change operation, as already described.

(Modified example of setting error check processing)
The setting abnormality check process may be executed during the main control side timer interrupt process. In this case, it is preferable to execute at least before the special symbol management process of step S093. For example, preferably before error management processing.

When the setting error check process described above is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (=5AH) (step S357). If the setting error flag is ON (step S357:=5AH), it is determined that a set value data abnormality (RAM abnormality) has occurred, and the processing of step S360 described below is performed without executing the prefetch determination processing (step S358). move on. Therefore, when a set value data abnormality occurs, a pending addition command having prefetch inhibited data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S360, which will be described later).

Although the details will be described later, if an abnormality in the set value data occurs in the start-up check process (processing at the time of winning), a pending addition command including prefetching prohibited data (9FH) is transmitted without performing RAM error processing. Then, the starting port check process is exited. When the set value data abnormality occurs, RAM error processing is performed in the subsequent special symbol variation start processing (processing at the start of variation) in FIG. 18 (see step S411 in FIG. 18).

On the other hand, if the setting error flag is not ON (step S357: ≠5AH), that is, if the set value data is a normal value, prefetch determination processing is executed (step S358). In this look-ahead determination process, a big hit lottery result executed at the start of variation is fore-readed and determined, and a look-ahead variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result. For details, "prefetching winning judgment processing" to judge the result of the winning lottery at the start of the fluctuation, "prefetching design judgment processing" to judge the result of the design lottery at the start of the fluctuation, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation A series of processes relating to prefetching determination are executed, including a "prefetching variation pattern determination process" for prefetching determination.

((a) Winning time jackpot random number determination processing (predictive win-loss determination processing))
In the look-ahead determination process in step S358, first, a look-ahead win-lose determination process is executed. In this look-ahead win-lose determination process, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the special symbol operation confirmation data is acquired, and then the big hit determination random number value acquired in the process of step S353 is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for big hit determination and the hit random number determination table, a win/lose lottery (predictive win/lose determination) targeting the currently activated ball is performed. That is, the result of the winning/losing lottery at the start of variation executed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation ("big hit determination process (S413 in FIG. 18 described later)" and "small hit determination process (described later)" The result of S414) in FIG. 18) is prefetched and the result (prefetch result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes a special figure 1 hit random number determination table (not shown) related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a special figure 2 hit random number determination table (not shown) related to the special symbol variation display game 2. not shown). In this process, either the random number determination table for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is selected according to the value of the special symbol operation confirmation data. In these hit random number determination tables, there are determination values (winning areas corresponding to high and low probabilities) for determining big hits, small hits (only for special figure 2 in this embodiment), and loss. It is determined (there is no judgment value (winning region) where a big win and a small win are won at the same time), and it is judged to which judgment value (winning region) the random number for judging a big win belongs. Thus, the type of winning or losing is determined according to the current jackpot lottery probability (high probability, low probability). The jackpot lottery probability is, in other words, the operating probability of the condition device.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a table corresponding to the set value (at least a table in which at least the lottery probability of the big win is different according to the set values 1 to 6). Also, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase rate) is the same for each set value. In this embodiment, the ratio is set to a value not exceeding ten. For example, in the case of setting 6 related to the special figure 1 hit random number determination table, when the probability is low, the jackpot is won at 1/320, and when the probability is high, the jackpot is won at about 1/137. /332, and when the probability is high, it is about 1/142 and the jackpot is won. It should be noted that, instead of the hit random number determination table that differs for each set value, a table that is common to some of the set values may be used. For example, there is a table in which settings 1 and 2 are common, and settings 3 to 6 have different jackpot lottery probabilities. In addition, when referring to the common winning random number determination table for some setting values, the degree of profit (ball output rate) will be the same performance, but in the symbol table described later, the symbol selection rate for each winning type is set. A different probability may be set for each value. The hit random number determination table is also used in the process (FIG. 18) at the start of fluctuation.

Here, in the present embodiment, the prefetch win/lose result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register incorporated in the CPU. This is because the look-ahead winning/losing determination result is immediately used in subsequent look-ahead pattern determination processing, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM.

((b) Winning Special Stop Symbol Creation Process (Look-Ahead Symbol Judgment Process))
In the look-ahead design determination process, first, a "design table (big-hit design table, small-hit design table, or losing design table: not shown)" corresponding to the look-ahead winning result (big hit, small hit, or loss) and step The special symbol determination random number obtained in the process of S353 is obtained. Next, based on the acquired symbol table and the random number for special symbol determination, symbol lottery (pre-reading symbol determination) is performed for the currently activated ball. That is, the result of the pattern lottery at the start of variation (the result of the "special stop symbol creation process (see S415 in FIG. 18)" to be described later) executed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation is read ahead and determined. Then, the result (read-ahead pattern result) is obtained.

The big hit symbol table, the small winning symbol table, or the losing symbol table include the symbol table for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the symbol for the special symbol 2 according to the special symbol variation display game 2, respectively. Contains a table. Each symbol table has a determination value (winning area) for determining the type of winning, and depending on which determination value the random number for special symbol determination belongs to, special symbol determination data and special stop A symbol number is determined. The above symbol table is also used in the special stop symbol creation process (step S415 in FIG. 18), which is the process at the start of fluctuation.

The above "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the type of winning, that is, the winning type (symbol type). This is data for identifying whether the The "special stop symbol number" is data specifying a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. used. In the present embodiment, for example, even in the case of the same "losing A", the display mode of the special stop symbols (display mode of 7 segments) displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b may differ (for example, , "-." in case of loss A of special figure 1, "1." in case of loss A of special figure 2, etc.).

In this embodiment, since the "small hit" is excluded from the big hit lottery targets on the side of the special figure 1 (no small win winning), the small winning pattern table for the special figure 1 is not provided. Therefore, with regard to the special figure 1, in the special figure 1 jackpot pattern table, one of the jackpots 1 to 4 is determined by a predetermined pattern lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and in the special figure 1 losing pattern table , one of the losses A to C is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, the loss A is 95%, the loss B is 4%, and the loss C is 1%). Regarding special figure 2, in the special figure 2 jackpot pattern table, one of jackpot 5 to jackpot 8 is determined by a predetermined pattern lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and in the special figure 2 jackpot pattern table , the small hit is determined by 100%, and in the losing pattern table for special figure 2, the losing A is determined by 100%. In addition, on the special figure 2 side, since the type of loss is one type of loss A, it is sufficient to simply determine loss A without providing a loss pattern table (without performing a symbol lottery).

Further, a symbol table defining different symbol selection rates according to set values may be provided for some or all of the above symbol tables. For example, with respect to the jackpot pattern table, a table with different selection rates for the jackpot type for each setting value 1 to 6 (in this case, 6 types of jackpot pattern tables corresponding to the 6 stages of setting values) can be provided (small hit The same applies to the pattern table and the lost pattern table). For example, if the hit type on the special figure 1 side is representatively explained, the symbol lottery rate of jackpots 1 to 4 is set to "3%, 7%, 55%, 35%" in the case of setting 1, and setting 6 In the case of , it can be "8%, 12%, 45%, 35%" (the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot 1, which triggers the transition to the jackpot rush (potential state), and the jackpot 2 ( The winning probability of 16R probability variation) is relatively high). Moreover, although the probability variable inrush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, it may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the example of FIG. 4, the probability variable rush rate is 65% (35% is a time-saving jackpot), but in the case of setting 1, the probability variable rush rate is 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the probability variable rush rate is 65%. For example, all or part of the set values may have different probability variable inrush rates. Likewise, the time saving rush rate may be set constant regardless of the set value, or may be varied by all or part of the set value. The symbol lottery rate, the variable probability entry rate, and the time-saving entry rate can be determined so that the higher the set value, the more advantageous the ball-out performance will be for the player.

Then, the result of the look-ahead pattern is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU, as in the case of the look-ahead winning/losing determination described above. This is because the look-ahead pattern result is immediately used in subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM.

((c) random number determination process at the time of start-up winning (look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process))
In the look-ahead variation pattern determination process, first, a look-ahead variation pattern allocation table (not shown) is obtained according to the look-ahead pattern result, and the variation pattern random number value obtained in the process of step S353 is obtained. Next, a fluctuation pattern lottery (prefetch fluctuation pattern determination) is performed based on the acquired prefetch fluctuation pattern allocation table and fluctuation pattern random number value to determine a prefetch fluctuation pattern. In other words, the variation pattern at the start of variation (the result of the special symbol variation pattern creation process (see S417 in FIG. 18 described later)) determined when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation is read in advance. It judges and acquires the result (look-ahead fluctuation pattern). Winning command data 1 (suspended addition command (EVENT)) corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern is determined in the look-ahead variation pattern distribution table. That is, the content of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding the number of retained balls information) is designated by the winning command data 1 determined in the look-ahead variation pattern determination process. As a result, the winning command data 1 is updated from "9FH" set in step S354 to a data value corresponding to the prefetch variation pattern (step S359).

In the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern allocation table, there are multiple types of look-ahead variation according to the game state and the winning type (for loss A (for special figure 1 and special figure 2), loss B, loss C, jackpot 1 to 8) A pattern apportionment table is provided, and the table structure is such that a prefetch variation pattern (winning command data 1) can be determined by lottery using random numbers for variation patterns. For example, in the case where "Normal medium SP reach A" (see FIG. 35 (A) Loss B column) is determined as the variation pattern at the start of variation when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation Also in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, look-ahead variation pattern information (for example, "03H" as winning command data 1) designating "normal middle SP reach A" can be obtained. It should be noted that the same variation pattern allocation table as that used at the start of variation is not used when determining the look-ahead variation pattern. This is because the number of pending balls in operation at the time of predictive determination does not necessarily match the number of pending operations at the start of variation, and therefore the variation pattern at the time of the start of variation cannot be accurately determined in advance. For this reason, in the step of determining the look-ahead variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of pending balls. However, even if the prefetch variation pattern is determined without considering the number of balls in operation, it is possible to determine the prefetch variation pattern that minimizes the deviation between the content of the prefetch variation pattern and the variation pattern at the start of variation. . In the present embodiment, since fluctuation pattern distribution tables (FIGS. 34 to 36) corresponding to set values are provided, the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern distribution tables are similarly tables corresponding to each set value. is provided. Of course, a common table may be used for each set value.

The look-ahead variation pattern information (winning command data 1 (EVENT)) is immediately used in the pending addition command creation process of step S359, and this data is not needed thereafter. Therefore, here as well, the processing is finished while the result of the prefetch variation pattern determination is not stored in the RAM 203 but is fetched into the register.

When a series of prefetch determination processing of steps S358 to S359 is completed, subsequently, the winning command data 1 (EVENT) on the lower byte side obtained in the above-described prefetch variation pattern determination processing, the current number of pending balls in operation and special symbols Based on the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side based on the type, a "reserved addition command" is created (step S360), and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without storing it in the RAM 203 (step S361). For the data on the MODE side, for example, "B6H to B9H" is set according to 1 hold of special figure 1 to 4 holds of special figure 1, and 1 hold of special figure 2 to hold of special figure 2 "BBH to BEH" is set according to the four. As for the data on the EVENT side, if the pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied or if an error occurs in the set value data, the pre-reading prohibition data (9FH) acquired in step S354 is not updated in the processing of step S359. The pending addition command "**9FH ('**' is any value of B6H to B9H or BBH to BEH)" with prefetch inhibited data will be transmitted.

In addition, in the determination process in the above step S351, if the number of operation pending balls is the maximum number of pending storage (4) (step S351:=MAX), it is determined that over winning has occurred, and the command for over winning is issued by the production control unit. 24 (step S363). Specifically, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, when over winning occurs at the special figure 1 start port (middle start port 34 or right start port 33), over winning for special figure 1 A command "B006H" is transmitted. Also, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, when over winning occurs at the special figure 2 start opening (lower right start opening 35), the over winning command "B106H" for special figure 2 is transmitted. be done.

After the pending addition command or the command for over winning is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, when the "prediction effect" related to the current operation pending ball is displayed on the effect control unit 24 side It is only used and not used in subsequent processing. Therefore, these commands are not stored in the RAM 203, and the starting port check process is exited.

As described above, in this embodiment, the starting port check process is finished without storing the various data obtained by the series of prefetch determination processes in step S358 in the RAM one by one. Thereby, the memory capacity of ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, in the starting point check process (processing at the time of winning), regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value data, a pending addition command is transmitted, but this pending addition command has prefetch prohibition data (9FH). Since it is a command, the effect control itself related to the pre-reading notice is prohibited. Therefore, the pre-reading notice caused by the malfunction does not appear. In the event that a pending addition command related to the setting value is created, or a pre-reading notice effect based on this is configured to be able to appear, if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the pre-reading notice is allowed. If this is the case, there is a risk that a defective pre-reading notice effect, such as a high-expectation pre-reading notice or an accurate pre-reading notice, which is a failure, will appear indiscriminately due to an abnormality in the set value data. However, in the case of this embodiment, when the set value data is abnormal, the pre-reading notice itself is completely prohibited, so such a problem does not occur. Further, even if a high-expectation pre-reading announcement effect appears due to a malfunction, the player cannot determine whether it is due to an abnormality. Therefore, if the progress of the game is forcibly stopped by the subsequent RAM error processing (step S411 during the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 18 to be described later) and the high-expectation look-ahead notice effect disappears. In the case of the present embodiment, the player's sense of anticipation for winning disappears at once, causing a great sense of distrust in the gaming machine.

<18. Special Symbol Fluctuation Start Processing: Fig. 18>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (steps S331, S334) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is "00H (special figure 1 is to be processed)" or "01H (special figure 2 is to be processed)" ( step S401). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, the processing target this time is the special figure 1, so in this case it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation reservation ball is zero (step S403). If the figure 1 operation reservation ball is zero (step S403: YES), the "customer waiting command transmission process" of step S420 described later is executed, and if the special figure 1 operation reservation ball is not zero (step S403: NO ), the process (steps S404 to S419) at the start of fluctuation for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for this fluctuation display is executed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, since the processing object of this time is the special figure 2, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is zero in this case (step S402). , If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is zero (step S402: YES), execute the "customer waiting command transmission process" in step S420 described later, and if the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is not zero (step S402 : NO), the process (steps S404 to S419) at the start of fluctuation for the special figure 2 operation holding ball to be used for this fluctuation display is executed.

(Customer waiting command transmission process: step S420)
In step S420, when the special figure 1 is to be processed (special symbol operation confirmation data "00H"), the process will be described below. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)". When the special pattern 1 operation status is "waiting for a customer (00H)", it is already in a state of waiting for a customer, so that nothing is done, the customer waiting command transmission process is exited, and the special symbol variation start process is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 operation status is not "waiting for a customer (00H)", a customer waiting standby process is executed when the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball becomes zero. In this customer waiting waiting process, 00H is set to the special symbol 1 operation status, and the special figure 1 side is shifted to the standby state without reservation (first customer waiting state) "Special figure 1 reservation zero time command (BA14H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customer (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customer (00H)", all suspension Assuming that the state has shifted to a zero customer waiting state (third customer waiting state), a "all pending zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the performance control unit 24, and the customer waiting command transmission process is exited. In the case of the present embodiment, this all pending zero time command is the same command as the customer waiting command (BA04H) transmitted when the power is turned on (see steps S023 and S029 in FIG. 8A).

Also when the special figure 2 is the processing target, the processing contents are almost the same as those of the special figure 1 described above. In step S420, when the special symbol 2 is to be processed (special symbol operation confirmation data "01H"), it is first determined whether the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting for customers (00H)". When the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting for a customer (00H)", nothing is done, the customer waiting command transmission process is exited, and the special symbol variation start process is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 operation status is not "waiting for a customer (00H)", the above-described customer waiting standby processing when the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball becomes zero is executed. In this customer waiting waiting process, 00H is set to the special symbol 2 operation status, and the special figure 2 side is shifted to the standby state without reservation (second customer waiting state) "Special figure 2 reservation zero time command (BA24H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customer (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customer (00H)", all suspension Assuming that the state has shifted to a zero customer waiting state, a "all pending zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the customer waiting command transmission process is exited.

Here, if the special symbol operation status is "waiting for customers (00H)", the reason for exiting the special symbol fluctuation start process without doing anything is that the customer waiting command is issued without any conditions when the number of operation pending balls is zero. If it is transmitted, the transmission of the demonstration display command will be repeated at a period of 4 ms while the number of balls on hold is zero, resulting in unnecessary transmission. Therefore, when the above "no operation hold ball" state is reached, send the special figure 1, special figure 2, all hold zero time command once, and if the demonstration display command has already been sent, Without transmitting the demonstration display command to the effect control section 24, the special symbol variation start process is exited.

When the production control unit 24 receives the special figure 1 pending zero time command, the current game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variable state, that is, the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (see FIG. 7 (b)) , when the special symbol variation display game 1 on the front variation side is not played for a first predetermined time (for example, 59 seconds) or more, the game is shifted to a first demonstration state (first normal customer waiting effect mode), and the customer Display the waiting demo screen. At this time, the first demonstration screen is displayed even when the special figure 2 is fluctuating (during reverse fluctuation). In addition, the first demonstration state (first demonstration screen) is continued at least until the special figure 1 operation holding ball is generated (it may be until the variable display of the special figure 1 is started).

In addition, when the special figure 2 hold zero time command is received, the effect control unit 24 is that the current game state is the latent state, that is, the special figure 2 table fluctuation state (see FIG. 7 (b)), and the second predetermined time When the special symbol variation display game 2 on the front variation side is not played for more than (for example, 60 seconds), the game is shifted to a second demonstration state (second normal customer waiting presentation mode) and a demonstration screen is displayed. At this time, the second demonstration screen is displayed even when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (during reverse fluctuation). In addition, the second demonstration state (second demonstration screen) is continued at least until the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated (it may be until the variable display of the special figure 2 is started).

In addition, when the production control unit 24 receives the all-reservation zero time command, in this case, since all the operation reservation balls are zero, regardless of the game state, over a third predetermined time (for example, 61 seconds) or more, When the symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are not performed, the game is shifted to a third demonstration state (third normal customer waiting presentation mode) and a demonstration screen is displayed. It should be noted that the third demonstration state (third demonstration screen) is continued in the current game state until at least an operation pending ball relating to the front fluctuation side is generated.

Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the third demonstration screen relating to no hold is displayed (after shifting to the third demonstration state), the mode shifts to the "power saving mode (special guest waiting effect mode)". This power-saving mode is a "power-saving customer waiting state" in which the gaming machine 1 is controlled to have low power consumption. In the case of this embodiment, as a power saving mode transition condition, a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen) after displaying the third demonstration screen (after transition to the third demonstration state). to power saving mode. When the power saving mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a power saving screen (for example, a character display of "power saving" on the liquid crystal screen), and the decoration except for the button LED 13b. Control is performed to extinguish part or all of the lamp 45 and other performance LEDs. Since the power saving mode is entered through the demonstration screen, the button LED 13b is already indicating that the operation is valid in the power saving mode. However, in the main control side main processing shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, after the game start command (see step S034 in FIG. 8B) is transmitted, when a predetermined time has passed, the "power saving mode" is entered. It's becoming This is because it is determined that the game start ready state is not ready until the game start command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is detected during the display period of this demo screen (during the demo screen), a "menu screen (game setting Production)” can be switched and displayed. The timing at which switching to the menu screen is possible, that is, the button valid period (operation valid period) in the demonstration screen is notified by the button LED 13b. In the case of this embodiment, the button LED 13b lights up or flashes in a notification mode (for example, orange) different from the normal notification mode (for example, white) as an operation effective notification in the demonstration screen, and it is a period during which switching to the menu screen is possible. is notified.

Note that the first predetermined time, the second predetermined time, and the third predetermined time may be the same time, respectively, or may be the same time for some of them (for example, the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time). There may be. Also, the display contents of the first demonstration screen, the second demonstration screen, and the third demonstration screen may be the same, or may be different. Moreover, in the case of the first demonstration screen and the second demonstration screen, the dedicated display area 160 may be preferentially displayed with respect to the demonstration screen to clarify the fluctuation display operation of the special figure during the reverse fluctuation.

In the description of steps S404 to S419 below, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 operation suspension ball is processed, 01H (special figure 2 is processed), special figure 2 operation suspension Although the processing is for the ball, the method of processing is substantially the same, so unless there is a particular need, in order to avoid duplication, we will explain the case where special figure 1 is the target of processing, and special figure 2 is to be processed will be omitted from the description.

When proceeding to the process of step S404, the number of pending balls in operation is subtracted by 1 (the number of pending balls in operation of the special figure to be used for this variable display operation -1: step S404), and the number of pending balls in operation after subtraction is included in the "hold Subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S405). By this pending subtraction command, the performance control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining active pending balls after the current active pending ball number is digested, and shifts the pending display currently being displayed.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging a special symbol, and for fluctuation pattern A random number) is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage area) corresponding to the reserved n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored. area) are stored in the reserved storage area corresponding to 'n-1', and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to zero to provide a free area. As a result, the order of starting the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of operation pending balls (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting gate wins any of the pending memories. It is specified that it corresponds to an area, and the pending storage of the new active pending ball is enabled.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). Details of the game state information transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a setting error check process is executed (step S409), and it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (=5AH) (step S410). The setting error check process of step S409 is common to the setting error check process (FIG. 27) of step S356 during the start port check process of FIG. This processing is common to S357.

(When no abnormal setting error occurs (when normal): processing route from S410 to S413)
First, the case where the setting error flag is not ON (normal operation) will be described, and the case where the setting error flag is ON (RAM failure) will be described later.

If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S410:=5AH), a setting value command is transmitted, and a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the big hit is won, a small determination for whether or not the small hit is won Hit determination processing is executed sequentially (steps S413 and S414). The setting value command contains information that can specify the current setting value, and is used by the effect control section 24 to control the appearance of the advance notice effect, the setting suggesting effect, etc. based on the setting value. Details of the big-hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20 and details of the small-hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Regarding the effect mode related to the setting value)
Since the setting value command includes setting value information, the effect control unit 24 can grasp and manage the current setting value from the setting value command. In the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect (including the pre-reading notice) and the hitting effect, the effect related to the current setting value (for example, setting suggestion effect described later) can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a guess element for guessing the internal set value, and the player can enjoy the game while guessing what the internal set value is. In addition, by realizing an effect according to the set value, it is possible to make a variety of effects.

As the "setting suggestion effect", for example, "low setting suggestion effect" suggesting low setting (settings 1 to 3), "even setting suggesting effect" suggesting even setting (settings 2, 4, 6), odd setting "Odd number setting suggestion effect" suggesting (settings 1, 3, 5), "high setting suggesting effect" suggesting high setting (settings 4 to 6), and "setting 6" of the highest setting value are definitely notified. There are a "setting 6 fixed effect", a specific range suggesting effect suggesting a set value in a specific range (for example, setting N or more (N<6))), and the like. For example, it is possible to suggest the current set value by displaying a specific item image or character image, or by producing a specific sound effect or a specific light effect. Such setting-suggesting effects can appear along with various advance notice effects such as ready-to-win effects, pseudo-continuations, player-participation-type effects, and look-ahead advance notice effects.

In addition, as effects related to setting values, the appearance rate of one or more types of specific announcement effects (for example, normal SP reach B, SP reach with pseudo 3, etc.) at each setting value or some setting values can be different. For example, even if the same variation pattern (for example, normal medium SP reach A) is selected in setting 1 and setting 6, the setting speculation factor is generated due to the difference in appearance rate. In addition, regarding the decorative patterns, the appearance rate of a specific losing pattern mode (decorative stop pattern at the time of losing: for example, "2", "2", "4") may be different for each set value or some set values. can be done. Note that the appearance rate can be determined as appropriate. For example, settings 1 to 6 have a high appearance rate, settings 1 to 3, settings 4 to 5, and settings 6 have different appearance rates, or settings 1 to 3 have the same appearance rate, and settings 4 to 6 can have different appearance rates.

Also, a setting suggestion effect using a pre-reading notice effect is possible. For example, it is possible to change the pending display (holding icon) to an item image for suggesting settings, or display a holding icon using a holding color other than the special holding display mode (special holding display mode). In this case, using the special hold display mode, the above-described low setting suggesting effect to specific range suggesting effect can be displayed. Also, the rate of appearance of the special hold display mode can be made different for each set value or some set values. Moreover, without using the special pending display mode, each setting value or a part of the setting values may have different appearance rates of a specific special pending display mode (for example, blue pending color).

In addition, after the power is turned on, the setting suggestion effect is displayed when the number of symbol variation display games reaches a predetermined number (for example, 128 games), or within a specific game number range (for example, between 128 games and 150 games). The appearance rate can be set to a high probability. Moreover, it may be not only after the power is turned on, but also after the end of the big win game, or after the end of the big win due to a specific big win. In addition, the number of executions of the pattern variation display game after the jackpot game and the performance during the jackpot game that triggers the transition to the probability variable state or the time saving state (non-transition to the probability state state) may be targeted. In particular, when a transition to a small-hit rush cannot be obtained even if a big hit is achieved (when a big hit with a potential state non-transition opportunity big hit (see FIG. 4) is won), a setting suggestion effect is hidden in order to excite the player. It is preferable to appear with a higher probability (including 100%) than when winning the probability state transition opportunity jackpot (appearance rate may be 0%). On the contrary, as a privilege for acquiring the transition to the small hit rush (if you win the latent state transition opportunity jackpot (see Fig. 4)), the setting suggestion effect is set to the latent state non-transition opportunity jackpot ( It is preferable to appear with a high probability (including 100%) rather than the appearance rate of 0%.

After finishing the win-lose lottery in steps S413 to S414, a special stop symbol creation process is then executed (step S415). This special stop symbol creation process is a process of executing a symbol lottery, and the winning type (hit type) is determined by this process. Specifically, the special symbol determination data (winning type (symbol type)) and the special stop symbol number are determined. It should be noted that this special stop symbol creation process is substantially the same as the "special stop symbol creation process at winning (prefetch symbol determination process)" described in the look-ahead determination process (step S358) during the starting opening check process in FIG. This is the content of the process, and here, the symbol lottery at the time of start of variation is performed.

Next, game state transition preparation processing is executed (step S416). In this game state transition preparation process, when a big win is made, based on the big win type and the current game state, necessary setting processing for designating the game state after the big win game is completed is performed (see FIG. 4).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S417). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern (FIGS. 33 to 36) at the start of variation relating to the operation pending ball to be used for the current variation display operation is determined. The details of this special symbol variation pattern creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, command transmission processing (step S418) at the start of fluctuation is performed. In the command transmission process at the start of variation, a "variation pattern specification command" capable of specifying the contents of the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S417) is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. do. In this variation pattern specification command, as variation pattern information, for example, game state information, win-lose lottery result information, variation time of special symbols, presence or absence of pseudo-run (if there is pseudo-run, the number of pseudo-runs), ready-to-win effect (If there is a reach effect, the reach effect type) is included, and the effect control unit 24 side is used to determine various advance notice effects to appear during the decorative symbol variation display game. be.

Further, following the variation pattern designation command, a "decorative design designation command" is generated based on the design lottery result obtained in the special stop design generation process (step S415), and this is transmitted to the effect control section 24. This decorative design designation command consists of 2 bytes, an upper byte (MODE) that designates a special design type and a lower byte (EVNET) that designates a big hit type, a small hit type, and a losing type. Therefore, the "decorative design designation command" includes information about the special design type and the winning type (design lottery result). Since winning type information is included in this decorative pattern designation command, the effect control unit 24 side mainly includes a combination of decorative patterns (ready-to-win patterns) when forming a ready-to-win state, and a decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed. It is used when determining the combination of (decoration stop pattern). Since the variation pattern specification command includes at least win-lose result information and variation pattern information, the effect control unit 24, based on this variation pattern specification command, creates an advance notice effect mode related to the current pattern variation display game. It is also possible to determine a stationary decorative symbol and execute a symbol variation display game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, switch to the special symbol operation status "varying (02H)" (store 02H in the special symbol operation status), turn on the flag during fluctuation of the special symbol type to be processed this time (5AH storage), and clears the judgment random number storage area to zero (step S419). The above-mentioned "fluctuation flag" is a flag indicating whether the special pattern is fluctuating, and when the flag is ON (=5AH), it indicates that the display operation of the special pattern is fluctuating display. , when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 1 and "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. Since the special figure 1 is explained here, the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is turned ON, and the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "fluctuation (02H)".

(When a setting error occurs (RAM error): processing route from S410 to S415)
Returning to the description of step S410, when the setting error flag is ON (step S357:=5AH), it is determined that an abnormality in the set value data has occurred, and the processing of steps S413 to S414 relating to the win/lose lottery is skipped, and step S415 is performed. Execute the special stop symbol creation process.

In this embodiment, the win-lose lottery is not executed when an abnormality in the set value data occurs. When a big win or a small win is won in the previous symbol variation display game, the big win determination flag and the small win determination flag indicating the winning are cleared (00H) at the end of the symbol variation display game. (See steps S505 and S511 in FIG. 26A to be described later). Therefore, if the win/lose lottery process of steps S413 to S414 is not executed in the current symbol variation display game, the win/lose lottery result is always "losing".

In the special stop symbol creation process of step S415, a symbol lottery is executed based on the result of the winning/losing lottery being "losing". In addition, in the case of a setting abnormality error, the type of failure may be determined using the failure pattern table as usual, but the failure dedicated to error may be determined. For example, in the present embodiment, 'failures A to C' are provided, but 'failure D', which is not normally selected, can be provided as a failure for setting error (error failure type).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S417). The details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process at the time of the abnormal setting error will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the special symbol variation pattern creation process is finished, the processes of steps S418 and S419 are executed, and the special symbol variation start process is exited.

After exiting the special symbol variation start process, the special symbol display data update process (step S335) of FIG. 16 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started.

(Modified example when a setting error occurs)
In the above embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the process of skipping the win-lose lottery (big hit determination process, small hit determination process) is performed. Steps S415 to S419 including S416) may be skipped and the process may be exited without doing anything. In other words, the special symbol management process is exited without starting the symbol variation display game. In this case, since the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command are not transmitted to the effect control unit 24, it is preferable to control the game execution disabled state assuming that a RAM error has occurred. For example, when a RAM error occurs, data to be transmitted to at least the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in order to explicitly notify that the game progress has stopped (that the special symbol variation display game is not executed) to clear. Further, during this RAM error, it is preferable not to execute at least normal symbol management processing (step S091) to special electric accessory management processing (step S095) as processing related to the symbol variation display game. Note that the performance display monitor process (step S101) is a process belonging to the outside memory side, so it may be configured to execute the process even if a RAM error occurs.

<19. Game state information transmission process: Fig. 19>
Next, the game state information transmission process (step S408) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the game state information transmission process.

In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first executes a varying command transmission process (step S425). In this fluctuating command transmission process, first, the current special symbol 1 operation status and special symbol 2 operation status are acquired, a fluctuating command is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 .

The above "fluctuation command" consists of 2 bytes, and the upper byte side data (EEH: MODE) that specifies that it is a fluctuation command, and a special figure that can specify the behavior of special figures 1 and 2 It consists of lower byte side data (EVENT) containing behavior information. The data of the lower byte (EVENT), the upper 4 bits are the special figure behavior information of the special figure 2 ("1 * H" ~ "3 * H": * is 1 to 3), the lower 4 bits are the special figure 1 Figure behavior information ("* 1H" ~ "* 3H": * is 1 to 3), and these combinations specify the behavior of special figures 1 and 2. For example, if "EE11H" indicates "special figure 2 waiting, special figure 1 waiting", if "EE12H" indicates "special figure 2 waiting, special figure 1 changing", "EE13H" If there is, it indicates "special figure 2 waiting, special figure 2 confirmed". The special figure behavior information included in the fluctuating command is, on the production control unit 24 side, the production display of the fourth pattern 157 and the fourth pattern 159 in the dedicated display area 160, and the production display between the front fluctuation state and the back fluctuation state. It is used when switching between

Next, state command transmission processing is executed (step S426). The state command includes at least game state information that can specify the current game state. Send a status command including remaining time saving number of times information, remaining ST number of times information and the like. The information included in the state command is used in the production control part 24 side for the shift control of the production mode and the advance notice production lottery, and is used for the display of the number of remaining time reductions and the number of times of consecutive residences on the liquid crystal screen. When the status command transmission is completed, the game status information transmission process is exited.

<20. Jackpot determination process: Fig. 20>
Next, the big hit determination process (step S413) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit determination process.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first sequentially determines the states of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag (steps S431 and S432). The special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag are flags for designating whether or not the big win has been won, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), the big win is decided. When the flag is OFF (=00H), it indicates that the jackpot has not been won (during the jackpot has not been won). The special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag or the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is set to 5AH (won) or 00H (non-won) based on the win/lose lottery result (win/lose lottery result regarding the big win) in step S436 described later. When this special symbol 1 big hit determination flag or special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), when the symbol variation display game ends (exactly, when the special symbol variation display ends Time) Cleared to zero (special symbol jackpot determination flag←00H) (see step S505 in FIG. 26A described later).

If either the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag or the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (the determination result of step S431 or S432 is '=5AH'), that is, when the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate When the big win is won in FIG. 2, or when the special figure 1 is the big win when the special figure 2 starts to fluctuate, nothing is done and the big win determination process is exited.

On the other hand, when both the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag are in the OFF state (00H) (the determination result of step S431 or S432 is '≠5AH'), the above according to the special symbol operation confirmation data A hit random number determination table (not shown) is obtained (step S433). This hit random number table is the same as the table used in the winning jackpot random number determination process (prefetch win/loss determination process) during the look-ahead determination process (step S358 in FIG. 17).

Next, the random number value for judging a big hit stored in the random number storage area for judging is acquired (step S434), and a win-lose lottery is performed based on the random number value for judging a big hit and the hit random number judging table (step S435: random number judging process), The result is stored in the jackpot determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S436). However, here, the hit-loss of the big hit is determined, and the hit-loss of the small hit is performed in the subsequent small-hit determination process (step S414). As a result, the big hit determination process is exited, and the small hit determination process is subsequently executed.

(regular lottery (with jackpot lottery), no jackpot lottery (no jackpot lottery))
In addition to the above-mentioned big hit determination process, if the current determination target is the special figure 1 operation pending ball, when the big hit determination process is executed, if the other special figure 2 is already in the big hit winning state (step S432: Special symbol 2 big hit determination flag = 5AH), this big hit determination process is skipped without executing the own big hit hit/loss determination (step S435). Similarly, when the object to be processed this time is the special figure 2 operation pending ball, if the other special figure 1 is already in the jackpot winning state (step S431: special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag = 5AH), its own The current big hit determination process is exited without executing the big hit hit/loss determination (step S435). That is, when one of the special symbols is determined to be a big hit (when the result of the symbol variation display game is a big hit), when executing the winning lottery related to the other special symbol, the big win is determined by the lottery. Exclusion from the object, that is, it is controlled to a "jackpot non-lottery state (special lottery state: hereinafter abbreviated as "no lottery")" that does not execute the judgment of whether it is a big hit or not. Therefore, the result of the other symbol variation display game without the big win lottery is a result other than the big win, that is, 'loss' or 'minor win'. In the case of this embodiment, when executing the winning lottery on the special figure 1 side, if the special figure 2 side is a big hit, the winning lottery result on the special figure 1 side becomes "losing", and the special figure 2 side When the winning/losing lottery is executed, if the special figure 1 side wins the big win, the winning/losing lottery result on the side of the special figure 1 becomes "a small win or a loss".

<21. Small hit determination process: Fig. 21>
Next, the small hit determination process (step S414) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit determination process.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines special symbol operation confirmation data (step S441). When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S441:=00H), nothing is done and the small hit determination process is exited. This is because the jackpot lottery target on the special figure 1 side does not include a small hit. Therefore, when a small hit is included in the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side, the processing of steps S442 to S445 described later may be executed.

When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S441:=01H), the special figure 2 hit random number determination table is acquired (step S442), and the random number value for big hit determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired. (step S443).

Then, a win-lose lottery is performed based on the big-hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table (step S4444: random number determination processing), and the result is stored in the small-hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S445). Here, as part of the winning lottery, it is determined whether or not the small win is won. If neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, the result of the lottery will be a loss.

<22. Fluctuation pattern creation processing: Fig. 22>
Next, the variation pattern creation process (step S417) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern creation process.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first acquires the "variation pattern distribution table selection table" shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is 01H (special figure 2 is the processing target) (step S452). As shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern distribution table selection table of this embodiment includes the current game state (YJ), winning type (special symbol determination data), special symbol big hit determination flag (normal lottery, no lottery) used to identify), and the variation pattern distribution table (FB1 to FB16 (for big hits), FH1 to FH25 (for losing)) is defined.

When the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, special figure 1 is to be processed (step S452:=00H), the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33 is referred to, and the current game state (YJ), the winning type (special symbol determination data), the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag, and the variation pattern distribution table (for the big hit in FIG. 34 or the special in FIG. 35) 1) is obtained (step S453B).

On the other hand, if the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, the special figure 2 is to be processed (step S452:=01H), referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. Game state (YJ), winning type (special symbol determination data), state of special symbol 1 big hit determination flag, and variation pattern distribution table (Fig. 34 (for big hit), Fig. 36) (Loss for special figure 2, small hit)) is acquired (step S453A).

Next, a variation pattern random number (size of random value: 10000) is acquired, and a variation pattern is selected by referring to the variation pattern allocation table acquired in the processing of step S453A or step S453B (step S455). In the variation pattern distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, determination values (winning regions) corresponding to the variation patterns are defined, and one of the variation patterns is determined at a predetermined selection rate. It has become so. For example, in the variation pattern distribution table FB1 of FIG. 34, the selection rate of "normal variation direct hit hit" is 200/10000, normal medium N reach 1 is 80/10000, ..., RUSH direct hit reach is 2600/10000 Then, one of the variation patterns from normal variation direct hit hit to RUSH direct hit reach is determined by lottery. When the variation pattern is determined, the upper byte side (MODE) and lower byte side (EVENT) command data for forming the "variation pattern designation command" are determined. It should be noted that the variation pattern specification command itself is created in the subsequent processing of step S418 in FIG.

Along with the determination of the variation pattern, a variation time table (not shown) corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined (step S456). In this "variation time table", the variation time of the special symbol is defined, and the variation time is determined by referring to the variation time table.

Then, the variable time determined in step S456 is set to the special symbol operation timer 1 corresponding to the current special symbol operation confirmation data (step S457). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, the variable time is set to the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 of the special symbol 1, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 of the special symbol 2 is set. Set the variable time.

As described above, the command transmission processing (step S418) at the start of variation in FIG. 18 is executed after exiting the special symbol variation pattern creation processing.

(22-1. Variation pattern distribution table selection process for special figure 2: Steps S453A to S455)
Here, the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table and the fluctuation pattern distribution table, which are characteristic elements of the present invention, will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, first, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S452:=01H), that is, the case where the current processing object is the special figure 2 operation reservation ball will be described.

In the process of step S453A, the variation pattern allocation table is determined by referring to the variation pattern allocation table selection table in FIG. If the result is "Loss A (Special Figure 2 Hold 0 Loss A, Special Figure 2 Hold 1-3 Loss A) or Small Hit (Special Figure 2 Hold 0 Small Hit, Special Figure 2 Hold 1-3 Small Hit)" 2, the variation pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on the ON/OFF state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag. In other words, the variation pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether the special figure 1 side has won a big hit or not.

Specifically, referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table in FIG. 33, if the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, the other special figure 1 has not won the big hit. In the case of a jackpot non-winning state (special figure 1 loss fluctuation)", one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH9 to FH12" in the "normal lottery" column shown in the same figure is selected. It's becoming On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, if the other special figure 1 is in the big hit "during the big hit winning state (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation)", the same One of the variation pattern distribution tables "FH13 to FH16" in the "non-lottery" column shown in the figure is selected ('holding 0 loss A in the special symbol type column "special figure 2" ~ Refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to 'holding 1-3 small hit'). In addition, in the case of 'normal state, time saving state and probability variable state' where special figure 2 is in the back variation state, the common variation pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag. It is designed to be

In this way, when the processing target this time is the special figure 2, whether or not the other special figure 1 has won the jackpot (ON, OFF state of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag: special figure 1 jackpot winning lottery result) as one of the conditions for selecting the variation pattern is as follows.

When the object to be processed this time is the special figure 2 side, when the other special figure 1 has already won a big hit, the winning lottery of the special figure 2 (step S435 in FIG. 20) is not executed. Therefore, the lottery result of this time is forced to be either "losing" or "small hit" (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the symbol lottery result (step S415 in FIG. 18) is "losing A" or It will be one of the "small hits". In the following description, the case where the jackpot lottery is executed is referred to as "normal lottery", and the case where the jackpot lottery is not executed is referred to as "no lottery" or "forced loss".

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, the current game state will be described as "during the latent probability state (special figure 2 table fluctuation state)" in which a small hit rush occurs.

During the latency state, a high-speed variation pattern (normal variation 2s to normal variation 4s) with a special pattern variation time width of 2 to 4 seconds is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 36). Such a "high-speed fluctuation state" is a game state that emphasizes the playability of "increasing the average speed of the game to improve the time efficiency of the progress of the game (increasing the ball output speed)". Useful. In particular, in a latent state where a small hit rush occurs, there are many players who want to quickly accumulate balls in a short time and enjoy the feeling of increasing the number of balls, and the high-speed fluctuation state is suitable for such a game state. is.

On the other hand, when selecting a variation pattern, in order to arouse the expectation of winning the big hit, the reach variation that specifies the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous variation that designates the pseudo-continuous are moderately interwoven to make the fanning effect monotonous. It is necessary to devise ways to prevent this from happening. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, the variation pattern distribution table "FH9 to FH12" for the normal lottery shown in FIG. As shown, the selection target includes a variation pattern designating an advance notice effect with a high degree of excitement (for example, a high-expectation notice effect). Specifically, the fluctuation time is relatively long "Potential Medium Weak SP Reach (Variation Time 30 seconds)", "Potential Medium Strong SP Reach (Variation Time 40 seconds)", and "Fall Avoidance Reach Gase (Variation Time 20 seconds)" )”, etc. (For example, a high-expectation notice effect such as SP reach, a special notice effect (fall avoidance reach) , player participatory effects, etc.) are included in the selection targets.

However, under the situation of no lottery, if a variation pattern that specifies a notice effect with a high degree of excitement is included in the selection target like the conventional variation pattern selection technology described above, only a loss or a small hit will be won. In spite of this, a variation pattern with a long variation time is unnecessarily selected, leading to a game situation in which the progress of the game is unnecessarily delayed. In addition, under the situation of no lottery, the high-expectation-level announcement effect is meaningless and only arouses the tension of the player, and there is little significance in presenting the effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern allocation table selection table shown in FIG. 33 is configured so that the variation pattern allocation table can be selected according to whether the normal lottery or the non-lottery. Here, since it is explained that the current game state is a latent state, if the other special figure 1 is ``during the jackpot non-winning state (during special figure 1 losing fluctuation)'', ``At the time of normal lottery ( To select the variation pattern distribution table "FH9 to FH12 (see the column of ``potential probability, normal lottery'' in the figure)" for special figure 2 with jackpot winning lottery), 'during the jackpot winning state (special figure 1 In the case of 'jackpot fluctuation)', for non-lottery (no special figure 2 jackpot lottery) fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH13 to FH16 (see column ``potential, no lottery'' in the figure)" is selected be done.

(22-1-2: Characteristics of fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery)
As shown in FIG. 36, the "non-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH9 to FH12" have the following features compared to the "normal lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH13 to FH16". It is set. In the following, the term "not selected" may refer to either the case of "a variation pattern lottery is performed but the selection rate is 0%" or the case of "excluded from the lottery".

(W) At least the reach variation pattern is not selected. In the case of the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo-running fluctuation pattern are not selected, and only the normal fluctuation pattern with relatively low winning expectation is selected (eg, see Tables FH13 to FH16). Therefore, the player-participation type performance requiring a relatively long duration of performance time, the ready-to-win performance, and other notice performances with a high degree of anticipation for winning a big win, that is, high-expectation notice performances, do not appear. In particular, when the reach variation pattern is not selected, the appearance rate of the reach effect can be zero. In addition, it is good also considering the selectivity of a reach fluctuation pattern as a relatively low probability. (f) The selectivity of "short fluctuation patterns" with relatively short fluctuation times (for example, normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 3s, etc.) is high. In other words, the selectivity of the "long fluctuation pattern" with a relatively long fluctuation time is low. Therefore, in this case as well, the high-expectation-level announcement effect is not displayed, or is difficult to be displayed, as in the case of (W) above. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the selectivity of the shortest normal fluctuation 2s is high (for example, comparison between "FH10 and FH14" and "FH12 and FH16"). Therefore, in the non-lottery, it is better to switch the variation pattern allocation table between the non-lottery and the normal lottery than to refer to the variation pattern allocation table common to the non-lottery and the normal lottery. The average digestion speed per game will be faster.
To put the above (W) and (F) in a nutshell, the fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively lower expectation of winning a big win than the fluctuation pattern distribution table for normal lottery. is likely to be selected. As a result, when there is no lottery, it is easier for low-expectation notice effects with relatively low winning expectations to appear than during normal lotteries (the probability of appearance is high), and high-expectation notice effects, etc. It becomes difficult to be caught (the appearance rate becomes low probability).

(Modified example of fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery)
In addition, in the case of no lottery, as described above, focusing on the technical idea of 'making it difficult to appear the high-expectation notice effect' or 'not allowing the high-expectation notice effect to appear', the following A table configuration may be used.

(Y) In the case of no lottery, instead of "do not select the reach variation pattern" as in (W) above, the variation pattern specified by N reach is selected, but the variation pattern specified by SP reach It is good also as a table structure of not selecting (Among the reach fluctuation patterns, at least the reach fluctuation pattern of SP reach specification is not selected). This is because the N reach type (for example, latent N reach) has a shorter fluctuation time than the SP reach type (for example, latent medium low SP reach), and the winning expectation is also low. In this case, among the high-expectation-level announcement effects (eg, SP reach), the "extreme heat announcement effect (eg, strong SP reach)" with a relatively high level of expectation is not displayed.
(Yo-1) Further, it may be configured such that at least the variation pattern with the highest winning expectation is not selected among the variation pattern types at the time of losing. For example, in the case of latent probability, "normal variation 2s to latent medium weak SP reach, fall avoidance reach" other than latent medium high SP reach can be selected. In this case, the intense heat forewarning effect is not displayed or is less likely to be displayed. That is, this example is a form that does not exclude even the appearance of the intense heat forewarning effect.

(b) In the non-lottery, the "fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery" may be used for both the case of losing and the case of a small hit. For example, without providing "FH13 (for zero pending), FH14 (for 1 to 3 pending)" for loss A, "FH15 (for zero pending), FH16 (for 1 to 3 pending) for small hits case)” can also be used.

(d) A table that does not depend on the number of pending balls may be used when there is no lottery. For example, regardless of the special figure 2 operation reservation number, in the case of loss A, "FH14" is used, and in the case of a small hit, "FH16" can be used. In this case, it may be configured such that "FH14" or "FH16" is used for the loss A and the small hit.

(G) In addition, as shown in FIG. 36, the "non-lottery fluctuation pattern distribution tables FH11 to FH12" according to the present embodiment have variations common to the "normal lottery fluctuation pattern distribution tables FH13 to FH16". Although a pattern is defined, the present invention is not limited to this. Partially different types of variation patterns or entirely different types of variation patterns can be defined in the "variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery" and the "variation pattern distribution table for non-lottery". Specifically, the following configurations (So-1) to (So-2) can be used.
(S-1) In the ``normal lottery variation pattern apportionment table'', as shown in FIG. However, in the "variation pattern distribution table for non-lottery", it is possible to define a variation pattern that is partly or wholly different from these. For example, one or more types of variation patterns can be defined as variation patterns exclusively for non-lottery. Specifically, we have prepared a variation pattern that does not correspond to any of the normal variation 2s to fall avoidance reach”, such as “Normal variation for no lottery 2s (variation time 2 seconds)” and “N reach for no lottery”. Four types of normal fluctuation 2s to normal fluctuation 4s (common with normal lottery) and normal fluctuation 2s for non-lottery (only for non-lottery) may be defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for lottery, or no lottery It is also possible to define only the normal variation 2s. In addition, when setting it as the structure which can select a reach fluctuation pattern, you may further include "the N reach for no lottery." In any case, the non-lottery variation pattern distribution table has a table structure in which a variation pattern with a relatively low winning expectation for a big win is more likely to be selected than the normal lottery variation pattern distribution table. can do.
(So-2) When a variation pattern exclusive for non-lottery is selected, as a notice effect, a notice effect that suggests or definitely notifies that the result of the pattern change display game on the reverse side change side is a big hit is displayed. can be made In other words, it is possible to make the announcement effect regarding the game result on the back variation side appear on the main effect side on the front variation side.

(T) In the event of no lottery, it will always be a loss or a small win, so in any of the above-mentioned cases (W) to (So-2), of course, the big win will be notified with certainty. The winning performance is not displayed, but the winning performance for notifying the winning of a small win can appear.

(Other reasons for setting up the fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery)
By the way, the above-mentioned point that ``the configuration in which the variation pattern allocation table is switched between the non-lottery and the normal lottery speeds up the average processing speed per game'' also has the following advantages. Details will be described below.

If the processing target this time is the special figure 2 and the other special figure 1 wins the jackpot, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected as "fluctuation per 4 minutes during latent probability" (the game of FIG. 34 Refer to the "FB5" column of "Special Figure 1, Common A (meaning common (combined) for jackpots 1 to 4)" corresponding to the column of state type "probability"). Therefore, it takes a maximum of 240 seconds until the big hit variation of this special figure 1 ends.

Here, the fact that the special figure 1 has won the jackpot means that if the jackpot type is the jackpot 1 (selection rate 5%) or the jackpot 2 (selection rate 10%), the latent probability state is entered again. , it will be a small hit rush, but there is a high possibility that you have won the big win 3 or 4 (in the case of this embodiment, the probability of falling from the latent probability state is 85% (the selection rate of the big win 3 is 50%). , the selection rate of jackpot 4 is 35%), which is a high probability (see FIG. 4)). In addition, during the latent definite state, the special figure 1 side is in the reverse fluctuation state (see FIG. 7), and in terms of performance, it is not notified which one of the jackpots 1 to 4 has been won, and the player side For, there is no clue to know whether the variation of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit variation or a loss variation.

However, in terms of the game situation, in any case, it is in a critical situation that the "small hit rush" ends due to the special figure 1 jackpot winning. In particular, if the jackpot 3 or jackpot 4 is internally elected, it is not a latent probability transition trigger jackpot. , the future profit of the player will be greatly influenced by whether or not more small winnings can be obtained.

However, even though the special figure 2 side is in a non-lottery state, as the variation pattern of the special figure 2, if the long variation pattern of the order of several tens of seconds to minutes is recklessly selected, the lottery on the special figure 2 side The chance to receive is lost for the variable time, which greatly affects the profit received by the player during the small win rush.

However, as in the present embodiment, when there is no lottery, if the variation pattern distribution table (FH13 to FH16) dedicated to the case of no lottery in FIG. 36 is selected, a short variation pattern is selected, so the player Therefore, the player is provided with a game development that is beneficial to the player without being disadvantaged.

(22-2. Variation pattern distribution table selection process for special figure 1: Steps S453B to S455)
Next, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S451:=00H), that is, the case where the current processing object is the special figure 1 operation reservation ball will be described.

In the process of step S453B, similar to the above-described special figure 2, the variation pattern allocation table is determined by referring to the variation pattern allocation table selection table of FIG. - The variation pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on the OFF state. In other words, the variation pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether the special figure 2 side has won a big hit or not.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 36, special symbol 2 big hit determination flag when symbol lottery result is "losing AC" in 'probability variation state' which is one of table fluctuation states. is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, if the other special figure 2 is in the jackpot non-election state (special figure 2 loss fluctuation), "For normal lottery (with special figure 1 jackpot lottery) Variation pattern distribution table "FH17 to FH20 (see column of "probability variation, normal lottery" shown)" is selected, and on the other hand, if the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, the other If the special figure 2 is in the jackpot winning state (special figure 2 big hit fluctuation), the variation pattern distribution table "FH21 to FH24 (illustrated " See the column of “Probable change, no lottery”)” is to be selected. It should be noted that, in the case of 'latency state' special figure 1 is back variation state, the common variation pattern distribution table "FH8" is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag. ing.

In this way, even if the processing target this time is the special figure 1, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag of the other special figure 2 (big hit winning lottery result) is used as one of the selection conditions for the variation pattern. The reasons for this are as follows.

When the object to be processed this time is the special figure 1, when the other special figure 2 wins the jackpot, the jackpot win-lose lottery of the special figure 1 is not executed and the result of the win-lose lottery is forcibly lost. (See FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, the symbol lottery result (step S415 in FIG. 18) will be one of losers A to C.

Under the situation of no lottery, for example, if the "normal lottery variation pattern distribution table 'FH17 to FH20'" shown in FIG. However, a relatively long “variable medium-low SP reach (variation time 30 seconds)” or “variable medium-strength SP reach (variation time 40 seconds)” etc. are selected, leading to a game situation in which the progress of the game is wastefully delayed. In addition, under the situation of no lottery, the advance notice effect (for example, high-reliability effect such as SP reach) that arouses the winning of the jackpot is meaningless, and the effect will only arouse the player's sense of anticipation and tension. It lacks the meaning to make it appear.

In view of such circumstances, in this embodiment, regarding the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. It has a configuration that allows selection of a variation pattern allocation table according to the presence. Specifically, if the current game state is a variable state, if the other special figure 2 is ``during the jackpot non-winning state (during special figure 2 losing fluctuation)'', "at the time of normal lottery (special figure 1 jackpot winning lottery Yes) variation pattern distribution table "FH17 to FH20" is selected, and in the case of 'jackpot winning state (during special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation)', a variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected `` The variation pattern distribution table "FH21 to FH24" for non-lottery (no special figure 1 jackpot lottery) is selected.

Referring to FIG. 35, the above-mentioned "non-lottery fluctuation pattern distribution tables FH21 to FH24" according to the present embodiment are compared with the above-mentioned "normal lottery fluctuation pattern distribution tables FH21 to FH24". have characteristics like This will be explained by focusing on the "non-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH19 and FH20" and the "no-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH23 and FH24" which are typically selected at the time of losing B and C. do.

"Non-lottery fluctuation pattern distribution tables FH23 and FH24" are the same as the features described in the above "(22-X: Characteristics of non-lottery fluctuation pattern distribution table)" (1) It has characteristics such as no reach fluctuation pattern is selected, (2) a short fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (here, normal fluctuation 1 s) has a high selectivity. In addition, (3) in the case of no lottery, instead of "not selecting any reach fluctuation pattern", a table configuration in which a fluctuation pattern designated by N reach is selected but a fluctuation pattern designated by SP reach is not selected. may be

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the "variation pattern distribution table F17, F18 for normal lottery" and "non-lottery As shown in FIG. 35, the fluctuation pattern distribution tables F21 and FH22 for normal lottery" have the same configuration, but even in the "normal lottery fluctuation pattern distribution tables F17 and F18" Like FH19 and FH20 to be selected, it is possible to provide a variation pattern that designates "7 symbols in the probability variation" or reach, and the selection rate can be determined as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of losses A to C are provided, but one type may be used. "FH23" may be adopted as the hourly variation pattern allocation table. In this case as well, the above-described characteristics of the non-lottery fluctuation pattern allocation table and the effects thereof can be exhibited.

(22-3. About selection of variation pattern at the time of abnormal setting error)
During the abnormal setting error, as already explained, "missing" is always determined. Specifically, one of the losses A to C on the special figure 1 side, and the loss A on the special figure 2 side is determined. Therefore, in this case, it is a case of a forced loss, which is the same as the above-described "situation during no lottery" (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, at the time of setting error (when the setting error flag is ON state) while the game state is the probability variable state or the latent probability state, the variation pattern distribution table for the non-lottery time can be selected. .

(Modified example of selection form of variation pattern in case of abnormal setting error)
It should be noted that a "variation pattern distribution table for setting error" that is selected only when a setting error occurs may be provided. In this case, it is possible to provide a variation pattern distribution table (for special figure 1, for special figure 2) for setting errors according to the special symbol type. Here, since it is forcibly lost during a setting error, the fluctuation pattern distribution table for setting errors has a high degree of premonition in the same way as the fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery. It is preferable to configure the table such that a variation pattern designating an effect (such as a high-expectation advance notice effect) is not selected. In consideration of this point, for example, the following configurations (1) to (2) are possible.
(T) At least do not select a reach variation pattern.
(ne) At least the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous variation pattern are not selected.
(n) Do not select at least the SP reach specified variation pattern. In this case, the reach variation specified by N reach and the normal variation pattern can be selected.
In the case of the above (tsu) or (ne), it is possible to select a normal variation pattern according to the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation after subtraction). For example, it is possible to select a normal variation of 12s when the number of pending balls in operation is 1, a normal variation of 8s when the number of pending balls in operation is 2, and a normal variation of 4s when the number of pending balls in operation is 3. . In addition, it is possible to select only a specific normal variation pattern regardless of the number of balls to be activated. However, there is no particular limitation on the specific normal fluctuation pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time (10 minute fluctuation) may be selected, or the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 2s) may be selected, or another normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 12s) may be selected. Further, as a specific normal fluctuation pattern, a normal fluctuation pattern dedicated to abnormal setting errors may be provided. It should be noted that the above (1) to (3) are preferably applied to any of the failures A to C. In addition, as already explained, there is provided a "failure D" that is selected only at the time of a setting error. minute table) is selected.

In addition, it is preferable that the variation pattern specification command during the abnormal setting error (hereinafter referred to as "variation pattern specification command for setting error") contains information that can identify the variation pattern for the abnormal setting error. . The effect control unit 24 can recognize that a setting abnormality error has occurred by receiving the "setting value abnormality command" transmitted in step S064 of FIG. This command is used for For this reason, by including information specifying that it has been selected at the time of a setting abnormality error in the setting abnormality variation pattern specification command, the effect control unit 24 can set the variation pattern specification command sent this time. It is possible to grasp that it is the variation pattern selected during the abnormal error, and to execute the effect control related to the decorative symbol variation display game dedicated during the abnormal setting error.

For example, it is possible to configure such that decorative symbol variation display games such as the following (c) to (ya) are executed.
(c) During the abnormal setting error, the notice effect itself is not displayed. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (background image corresponding to the effect mode) unrelated to the winning expectation and the variable display of the decoration pattern are performed.
(i) The variable display of decorative patterns is not performed. In this case, the variable display operation of the special symbols is executed, but the decorative symbols remain stopped. The fourth pattern 157 (decorative pattern 1, fourth pattern) and the fourth pattern 159 (decorative pattern 2, fourth pattern) in the dedicated display area 160 may be variably displayed or may remain in a stopped state. .
(b) Performs a variable display exclusively for setting abnormal error (variable display during RAM error). For example, without starting the normal fluctuation display, a "shake fluctuation" is performed in which the decorative pattern is shaken up and down. In this case, the shaking fluctuation may be performed with a combination of specific symbols (for example, lost symbols such as "2", "4", "0", etc.).
(ii) A normal variable display is performed, but when the display is stopped, the combination of specific symbols (for example, lost symbols such as "2", "4", "0", etc.) is displayed as a stopped display, or normal variation is performed. After the display is performed, a swing variation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time with a combination of specific symbols.
(M) Change from a normal decorative pattern to a special decorative pattern during a setting error. For example, the normal decorative pattern is a pattern displaying numbers 1 to 9, but the decorative pattern dedicated to setting error is changed to a pattern displaying characters such as "E", "La", "-".

<23. Special Symbol Fluctuation Processing: Fig. 23>
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S304 (corresponding to special figure 1), S309 (corresponding to special figure 2)) in the special symbol management process 1 in FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the details of the process during special symbol fluctuation in FIG.

In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is to be processed) or 01H (special figure 2 is to be processed) (step S471). When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S471:=00H), it is then determined whether or not the "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" is zero (step S472). The special symbol 1 operation timer here is set with the special figure 1 variation time (residual variation time). If the special symbol 1 operation timer is not zero (step S472: ≠ 0), the variation time of the special figure 1 has not yet passed, that is, the special figure 1 is being varied, so this special symbol variation without doing anything Intermediate processing (here, special figure 1 exits step S304 for processing). On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero (step S472:=0), the "special symbol 1 fluctuating process" shown in FIG. 24 described later is executed (step S473).

In the determination process of step S471, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (special symbol 2 is the object of processing) (step S471:=01H), then whether or not the "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is zero is determined (step S474). As for the special symbol 2 operation timer here, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (residual fluctuation time) is set. If the special symbol 2 operation timer is not zero (step S474: ≠ 0), the variation time of the special figure 2 has not yet passed, that is, the special figure 2 is being varied, so this special symbol variation without doing anything Middle processing (here, special figure 2 exits the processing target step S309). On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero (step S474:=0), the "special symbol 2 fluctuating process" shown in FIG. 25 described later is executed (step S475).

<24. Special symbol 1 fluctuation process: Fig. 24>
Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (step S473) in FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol 1 changing process in FIG.

In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first transmits a decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF01H" (special figure 1 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S481). The effect control unit 24 side that received this decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command grasps that the special symbol variation display game 1 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 1 has passed, and is currently performing variation display (table variation In the case of), the decorative pattern (decorative pattern 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 and the fourth pattern 157 of the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, when the special symbol variation display game 1 ends, the decorative symbol variation display game 1 also ends. It should be noted that the decorative design 1 fourth design stop command "BF11H" transmitted in step S498 of FIG. The former is a command that works as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is transmitted when the special pattern 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is a decorative pattern 1 and the 4th pattern 157 that are fluctuating at the time of forced loss. It is a command that works as a "special figure 1 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping display.

Then, as a setting process at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 1, switch the special symbol 1 operation status to "determining (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol 1 operation status), and confirm and display the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 Time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S482). When the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to the OFF state, stop display is started in the subsequent special symbol display data update process (step S335 in FIG. 16). Therefore, at this stage, to be precise, the special symbol (here, special symbol 1) is not stopped and displayed, but the control signal based on the display data is generated in the LED management process (step S098) through the special symbol display data update process. It is output to the special symbol display device, the stop display is started, and the stop display is continued until the fixed display time elapses.

Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S483). Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 has won the small hit, but in the case of this embodiment, since the small hit is excluded from the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side, the determination result of step S483 always becomes '≠5AH'.

(Special symbol 2 forced loss setting process; steps S485 to S489)
Next, the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is determined (step S485). If the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is not ON (5AH) (step S485: ≠5AH), nothing is done and the special symbol 1 fluctuating process is exited.

When the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S485:=5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S486).

Next, the state of the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is determined (step S487). If the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is not ON (5AH) (step S487: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 2 is not fluctuating, and nothing is done, and the special symbol 1 fluctuating process is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S487:=5AH), in order to forcibly stop the special symbol 2 during fluctuation, the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process of steps S488 to S489 is performed. conduct.

In the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process, first, a decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF12H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S488). The effect control unit 24 side, which has received the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command, grasps that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 has passed, and is currently performing a variation display (with table variation If there is), the decorative pattern (decorative pattern 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 and the fourth pattern 159 of the exclusive display area 160 are stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, when the special symbol variation display game 2 ends, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 also ends. Therefore, the "decorative design 2 4th design stop command" transmitted here works as a "special design 2 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying the 'decorative design 2 4th design' during fluctuation.

Then, various setting processes at the time of special symbol 2 compulsory loss are performed (step S489). Specifically, switch the special symbol 2 operation status to "determined (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol 2 operation status), clear the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 (special figure 2 fluctuation time management timer) to zero , Set the fixed display time (500 ms) to the special symbol 2 operation timer 2, set the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag to OFF state (store 00H), set the small hit determination flag to OFF state (store 00H) Then, the special symbol 2 stop symbol number is set to "200 (special stop symbol number corresponding to loss A on the special symbol 2 side)".

When the process of step S489 is completed as described above, the process during this special symbol 1 fluctuation is exited. Then, through the special symbol fluctuation process (step S309), the process proceeds to step S306 of the special symbol management process 1 of FIG.

<25. Special symbol 2 fluctuation process: Fig. 25>
Next, the processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation (step S475) in FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol 2 fluctuating process in FIG. It should be noted that this special symbol 2 during fluctuation processing (step S475) is basically the same processing content except that the special symbol type to be processed in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (step S473) is different. . Therefore, in FIG. 25, descriptions of substantially the same contents as those described in FIG. 24 are appropriately omitted in order to avoid overlapping descriptions.

In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first transmits a decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF02H" (special figure 2 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S491). The effect control unit 24 side that receives this decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command grasps that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 has passed, and is currently performing variation display (table variation In the case of), the decorative pattern (decorative pattern 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 and the fourth pattern 159 of the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, when the special symbol variation display game 2 ends, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 also ends. It should be noted that the decorative design 2 fourth design stop command "BF02H" transmitted in this process has the same function as the decorative design 2 fourth design stop command "BF12H" transmitted in step S488 of FIG. Although it is a command, the former is a command that works as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is sent when the special pattern 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is a command that works as a decorative pattern 2 that is fluctuating at the time of forced loss. And it is a command that works as a "special figure 2 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying the fourth pattern 159.

Then, as a setting process at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 2, switch the special symbol 2 operation status to "determining (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol 2 operation status), and display the confirmation on the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 Time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S492).

Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S493). If the small hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S493: ≠5AH), the process proceeds to determination processing in step S495. On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S493:=5AH), the special symbol stop 2 flag is set to ON (5AH) assuming that the small hit symbol has stopped (step S494).

(Special symbol 1 forced loss setting process; steps S495 to S499)
Next, the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is determined (step S495). If the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S495: ≠5AH), nothing is done and this special symbol 2 fluctuating process is exited.

When the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S495:=5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S496).

Then, the state of the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is determined (step S497). If the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is not ON (5AH) (step S497: ≠5AH), the special symbol 1 is not fluctuating, and nothing is done, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating process is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S497:=5AH), in order to forcibly stop the special symbol 1 during fluctuation, the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process of steps S498 to S499 is performed. conduct.

In the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process, first, a decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF11H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S498).

Next, the setting at the time of special symbol 1 compulsory loss is performed (step S499). Here, as various setting processes at the time of special symbol 1 forced loss, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "determining (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status), special symbol 1 operation timer 1 (special Figure 1 variable time management timer) is cleared to zero, special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is set to fixed display time (500 ms), special symbol 1 variable flag is set to OFF state (stores 00H), special symbol 1 is stopped The symbol number is set to a stop symbol number that designates the type of loss (one of loss A to C) determined in the special stop symbol creation process (step S415 in FIG. 18).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbols 1 and 2 are being simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, when the variation time of one of the special symbols ends first and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display is performed. Forced stop control is performed to forcibly terminate the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (set the fluctuation time to zero) and stop and display the other special symbol as a lost symbol. Further, when the variation time of one special symbol ends first and the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, measurement interruption control is performed to interrupt the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol during the variation display. In addition, while the measurement is interrupted, the fluctuating flag is not turned off, that is, it is treated as "in fluctuating display".

Then, of the special symbols 1 and 2, one of the special symbols is first stopped and displayed as a big win symbol, and in the case of performing "forced loss stop control" in which the other special symbol during fluctuation is stopped as a losing symbol, it is determined. Before the start of the display time, that is, when the fluctuation time of the one special symbol ends (when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero or the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero), the other special symbol is controlled to forcibly stop with a losing pattern. The reason for controlling in this way is that if, during the fixed display time (from the start of the fixed display time to the time when the fixed display has elapsed), the other special pattern is forcibly stopped with a lost pattern, the following This is because problems arise.

For example, if the special figure 1 is currently a big hit change and the special figure 2 is a small hit change and is being displayed in parallel, the special figure 1 is first stopped and displayed with the big hit design, and the special figure is displayed during the 500ms of the fixed display period. There may be a case where 2 is stopped and displayed as a small winning symbol. In this case, not only is there an overlap period in which the big-hit symbols and the small-hit symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, but on the side of the special symbol 1 that stopped earlier, the big-hit game occurs after the fixed display time elapses, and during the big-hit game. An inappropriate display state occurs in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b that the small winning symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. For this reason, the process related to the forced loss stop is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time ends (the determination result of step S472 or S474 in FIG. 23 is '=0', the special symbols in FIGS. 24 to 25 1 fluctuation process, refer to special symbol 2 fluctuation process).

Also, in this embodiment, one of the special symbols (here, special figure 2) is first stop-displayed as a small hit symbol, and the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (here, special figure 1) during fluctuation is measured. When performing measurement interruption control that interrupts, instead of setting the "special symbol stop 2 flag" when the fixed display time elapses, when the fluctuation time of special symbol 2 ends (special symbol 2 operation timer 1 When it becomes zero), "special symbol stop 2 flag" is set (steps S493 to S494), and in the timer management process of FIG. (processing route of '=5AH' in step S535). The reason for such control is that if the special symbol stop 2 flag is set between the start of the fixed display time and the elapse of the fixed display, the following problem will arise.

For example, currently, if the special figure 2 is a small hit fluctuation and the special figure 1 is a big hit fluctuation and is being displayed in parallel, the special figure 2 is first stopped and displayed with a small hit design, and during the 500 ms of the fixed display period, the special A case may occur in which FIG. 1 stops displaying the jackpot symbol. In this case, since the variation time of the special figure 1 has already passed, the measurement interruption process for the variation time of the special figure 1 can no longer be performed. Therefore, in this case as well, the same problem as in the above-described "forced unsuccessful stop" case occurs. In other words, an overlap period occurs in which the big hit pattern and the small hit pattern are stopped and displayed at the same time, and on the side of the special figure 2 that stopped earlier, a small hit game occurs after the fixed display time has elapsed, and during the small hit game An inappropriate display state occurs in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, in which the jackpot symbols in FIG. 1 are stopped and displayed. For this reason, the processing related to the measurement interruption related to the small hit is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 ends (the determination result of step S472 or S474 in FIG. 23 is '=0', FIG. 25 Steps S493 to S494 of the special symbol 2 during fluctuation processing, and the processing route of '=5AH' of step S535 of the timer management processing of FIG. 14).

When performing the above "forced loss stop control" or "measurement interruption control", in any case, instead of doing it during the fixed display time, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation time ), which does the necessary processing. This makes it possible to reliably prevent an inappropriate display state.

When the processing of step S499 is completed as described above, the processing during this special symbol 2 fluctuation is exited. Then, the process (step S309) during special symbol fluctuation is exited, and the special symbol management process 1 of FIG. 15 is exited.

<26. Processing during special symbol confirmation time: Fig. 26A, Fig. 26B>
Next, the processing during special symbol confirmation time (step S305 (corresponding to special figure 1), S310 (corresponding to special figure 2)) in FIG. 15 will be described. 26A and 26B are flow charts showing the details of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time.

In FIG. 26A, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is to be processed) or 01H (special figure 2 is to be processed) (step S501).

If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S501:=00H), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is zero (step S502), and the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is not zero. If so (step S502: ≠0), assuming that the fixed display time has not elapsed, nothing is done and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S502: = 0), the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" assuming that the final display of the special symbol 1 is completed ( 01H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status) (step S503), and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S504.

On the other hand, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S501:=01H), then it is determined whether the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is zero (step S508), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is If it is not zero (step S508: ≠ 0), it is determined that the fixed display time has not passed, and nothing is done, and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S508: = 0), the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" assuming that the final display of the special symbol 2 is completed ( 01H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status) (step S509), and the process proceeds to determination processing in step S504.

Hereinafter, in the processing of steps S504 to S521, the processing based on the special symbol operation confirmation data is performed, but the processing contents are basically the same except that the special symbol type to be processed is different. Therefore, in the following, the case where the processing target is special figure 1 (special figure operation confirmation data is 00H) will be described representatively, and the explanation for the case where the processing target is special figure 2 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

When proceeding to step S504, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the big hit determination flag on the side of the current processing target (special symbol 1 big hit determination flag in the case of special figure 1, special symbol 2 big hit determination flag in the case of special figure 2) A state is determined (step S504). Here, since the case where the processing target is special figure 1 (special figure operation confirmation data is 00H) is explained, the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is determined.

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON: steps S505 to S507)
When it is determined in step S504 that the jackpot determination flag is "ON state (5AH)" (step S504:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot pattern is stopped (step S505). Here, processing for designating the game state during the big winning game is performed as various setting processing (processing before starting the big winning game) when the big winning symbols are stopped. Specifically, as illustrated, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag. Also, the test signal jackpot determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH). This test signal jackpot determination flag is a flag used when a model test signal is output (trial test signal terminal management processing during performance display monitor processing described later (step S823 in FIG. 28, see FIG. 29). When the flag is ON (=5AH), it indicates that a big win game is in progress, and when the flag is OFF (=00H), it indicates that a big win game is not in progress. The big hit determination flags are provided with a test signal special symbol 1 big hit determination flag corresponding to the special figure 1 and a test signal special symbol 2 big hit determination flag corresponding to the special figure 2. Here, the object to be processed is is the special figure 1, the test signal special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH).Also here, the jackpot determination flag and various function flags are set to the OFF state (00H) and the jackpot The game state during the game is specified as "low probability/no power supply", and the special symbol short time counter and the special symbol variable probability counter are cleared to zero (00H is stored).

Next, 5000 ms is set to the special electric accessary product operation timer as the gate effective waiting time (step S506). The combination gate effective waiting time is an interval interval from when the jackpot is confirmed after the fixed display time of the special symbol has passed, until the detection of the game ball by the combination gate sensor 57a is set to an effective state, and is the opening. It refers to the time width that determines the production section (jackpot start production and right-handed instruction production). Therefore, the detection of the hand-linked gate switch 57a is disabled until the hand-linked gate effective waiting time elapses, and the round game is not started even if the game ball passes through the hand-linked gate.

Next, a combination gate operation interval start command (ED01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S507). The combination gate operation interval start command includes information that can specify the current big win type and the game state at the time of winning the big win, and the production control unit 24 side performs a big win start production according to the big win type this time. It is used when starting the right hitting instruction effect. When the above processing is completed, the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is exited.

(If the big hit determination flag is OFF: steps S510 to S521)
In the determination of the step S504, when it is determined that the big hit determination flag is "OFF state (00H)" (step S504: ≠ 5AH), the small hit determination flag is acquired, and the small hit determination of the current processing target side The state of the flag (special symbol 1 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 1, special symbol 2 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 2) is determined (step S510). In the case of this embodiment, since there is no small hit winning on the special figure 1 side, only the state of the special symbol 2 small hit determination flag (small hit determination flag) of the special figure 2 is actually determined.

When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (=00H) (step S510: ≠5AH), the process proceeds to step S512. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (=5AH) (step S510:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit design is stopped (step S511). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small-hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small-hit medium flag as processing before starting the small-hit game when the special symbol indicating the small-hit is stopped. . This small-hit medium flag is a flag for designating whether or not the small-hit game is in progress, and when the flag is ON (=5AH), it indicates that the small-hit game is in progress, and the flag is OFF. If it is in the state (=00H), it indicates that the small winning game is not in progress. Also here, the small hit determination flag for the test signal is set to the ON state (5AH). This test signal small hit determination flag is a flag used when outputting a model test signal, similar to the test signal big hit determination flag described above (test signal terminal management processing in FIG. 28 described later). (S823), see FIG. 29), when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), the small hit game Indicates that it is not inside. After completing the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small winning symbols, the process proceeds to step S512.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining number of special symbol time saving state) is zero (step S512). When the special symbol time saving counter is zero (step S512:=0), the process proceeds to step S517 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S512: ≠ 0), the special symbol time saving number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S513), and the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero. (step S514).

If the special symbol time saving counter after subtraction is not zero (step S514: ≠ 0), since the special symbol time saving state end count has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S517 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S514: = 0), the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends (in this embodiment, 7 times (in the case of time saving B) or 50 times (in the case of time saving A) ) is reached, the setting process at the end of the time saving is performed (step S515). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the general electric role product open extended state flag, the normal symbol time saving state flag, the normal symbol probability variable state flag, and the special symbol time saving state flag as the setting process at the time of the time saving end. As a result, from the next game, it will be placed under the "no electric support state" in which electric chew support is not given.

After finishing the setting process at the time of the time saving end of step S515, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S516). Since the state command transmitted in the game state information transmission process includes information on the number of remaining time reductions, the effect control unit 24 ends the time reduction state in this symbol variation display game and shifts to the normal state from the next game. When the next game (the first game after shifting to the normal state) is started, the above-mentioned "result effect" appears, and in the second game, the above-mentioned "firing position guidance effect (left-handed instruction effect) )” is performed (see (12) and (13) in FIG. 31E).

Next, when proceeding to the process of step S517, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S517).

When the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S517:=0), the special symbol confirmation time process is terminated. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation number counter is not zero (step S517: ≠ 0), the special symbol probability variation number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S518), and the special symbol after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S519).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S519: ≠ 0), it does not reach the ST specified number of times, so the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S519: = 0), the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches ST specified number of times (in this embodiment, 65535 times), setting at the time of probability variation end Processing is performed (step S520). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal game state accompanying the end of the latent state or the end of the probability variable state, the general electric role product open extension state flag, normal symbol time saving state flag, normal symbol probability change state flag, special symbol time saving state flag, And 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability variation state flags. As a result, from the next game onwards, the jackpot lottery probability is changed from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the ST prescribed number of times is 65535 times, the latent probability state or the probability variable state is substantially continued until the next big hit.

When the setting process at the time of probability variation end in step S520 is completed, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S521), and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited.

As described above, when the process during this special symbol confirmation time is completed, the special symbol management process 1 (FIG. 15) of step S093 shown in FIG. ).

<28. Performance Display Monitor Processing: Fig. 28>
Next, the performance display monitor process (step S101) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of performance display monitor processing.

In the present embodiment, the operating program and storage area for processing related to performance display are specified in the outside memory (second memory area). Therefore, in FIG. 28, in order to execute processing related to performance display, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer related to the RAM within the area (step S821), and executes processing such as setting the stack pointer related to the RAM outside the area. (Step S822).

Next, a trial-firing test signal terminal management process relating to output processing of a test signal to the trial-firing test device is executed (step S823). The details of this trial-fire test signal terminal management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an out-of-area RAM check process is executed to check whether or not there is any corruption in the stored data related to the performance display of the in-area RAM (step S824). The details of this out-of-area RAM check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 30A.

Next, an out-of-area LED management process is executed (step S825). In the out-of-area LED management processing, output control of a control signal (dynamic lighting data) to the performance indicator 99 is performed based on display data created in step S831, which will be described later. In the out-of-area LED management process, the data set in the identification display section output buffer and the base display section output buffer set in step S831 at the time of the previous interruption are output to the performance display unit 99, and the identification display section and data display are performed. control the display of parts. The identification display portion output buffer and the base display portion output buffer are for storing each display pattern data of the identification display portion and the base display portion, and are provided in the outside RAM. Note that this out-of-area LED management process may be executed after a display update process (step S831), which will be described later. 13 may be used to output the control signal to the performance indicator 99 (step S098).

(Processing related to operation confirmation display: processing route from step S826 to S833)
Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation timer is zero, that is, whether or not 5000 ms of the operation confirmation time at power-on has elapsed (step S826). If the operation confirmation timer is not zero (step S826: ≠0), an operation confirmation process is executed to perform an operation confirmation display (all blinking) when the power is turned on (step S833). As already described, the operation confirmation display is set in the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033 in FIG. 8B), which is part of the process when the power is turned on. If the power is interrupted during confirmation, when the power is restored after the power interruption, the operation confirmation timer is initialized when the power is restored, and the operation confirmation time of 5000 ms elapses again. The operation confirmation display is performed until the Details of this operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30B.

(Processing related to normal display: processing route from step S826 to S827)
On the other hand, if the operation confirmation timer is zero (step S826:=0), the normal display processing (steps S828 to S831) for displaying the performance information on the performance indicator 99 is performed assuming that the operation confirmation display is completed. go on.

First, the normal state determination flag is set to 00H (step S827). This normal state determination flag is a flag for designating whether or not it is a "measurement target section" for measuring performance information (base value in the case of this embodiment). In the case of the present embodiment, when the flag is ON (=5AH), it indicates that the section to be measured (during normal state), and when the flag is OFF (=00H), the non-measurement is indicated. Indicates that it is a target section (game state other than normal state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (step S828), and if it is the normal state (step S828: YES), the normal state determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH) ( Step S829), thereby specifying that it is a section to be measured. However, if it is not in the normal state (step S828: NO), nothing is done, that is, the normal state determination flag remains OFF (00H), and the process proceeds to step S830. Therefore, in this case, the normal state determination flag is maintained in the OFF state, and it is specified that the current game state is the non-measurement section.

By the way, in the RAM outside the area, a storage area for managing the same data as the current game state information (in this embodiment, the game state number YJ corresponds to) managed in the RAM inside the area is provided. The game state number YJ can be managed, and the value of YJ can be acquired and the determination process can be performed when determining whether or not the game is in the normal state in step S828. However, in this case, although the same data is managed in the RAM within the area, duplicated identical data will be managed in the RAM 203, and the control load will increase by unnecessarily putting pressure on the memory outside the area. . In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, access to the RAM within the area is not prohibited when executing processing related to the memory outside the area (processing related to performance display, etc.). Since the usage capacity of the memory is strictly limited, it is preferable to have the memory capacity recommended even a little. Therefore, in this embodiment, without providing a storage area for managing the current game state information (game state number YJ) in the RAM outside the area, by acquiring the game state number YJ on the side of the RAM inside the area, Whether there is or not is determined.

Next, switch input data setting processing is executed (step S828). In the switch input data setting process, the switch input data acquired in step S082, specifically, the middle starting opening sensor 34a, the right starting opening sensor 33a, the lower right starting opening sensor 35a, the upper large winning opening sensor 42a, the lower large Based on the input data of the winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a, input data regarding the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening is created. The data created here is used to count the normal payout number, normal out number, base value, and all state out number in the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S022) in FIG.

Next, the LED display data for displaying the base value obtained in the performance display monitor aggregate division process (step S040) in FIG. 8A on the performance display device 99 is updated (step S829: display data update process). , the identification display unit output buffer and the data display unit output buffer. The data created here is output in the outside-area LED management process (step S825) at the time of the next interruption. As a result, the display of the performance information on the performance indicator 99 is realized.

Then, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the performance display monitor process is exited. As a result, real-time display of performance information (in this embodiment, the current base value (real-time base value) and previous history information (history base value)) is realized on the performance indicator 99 . As described above, the processing of FIG. 28 functions as information display control means for controlling the performance indicator 99 based on the information display control program. In this embodiment, the RAM within the RAM 202 is provided with a game information storage area capable of storing game state data (game state number YJ in this embodiment) for specifying the current game state. A specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicating a specific game state (for example, normal state) is provided in the RAM 202 outside the area 2 RAM (step S829). Based on the game state data (game state number YJ) stored in the game information storage area of the internal RAM, the information display control means determines whether the current game state is a specific game state (normal state in this embodiment). (YJ=00H) determination means (step S828) for determining whether or not it is (YJ=00H); information storage means (step S829); calculation means (S040 and S830 in FIG. 8B) for calculating specific information (base value) relating to the game performance based on the specific data; and specific information calculated by the calculation means. and display control means (S825 and S831 in FIG. 28) for controlling display of information related to the performance indicator 99.

<29. Trial test signal terminal management process: Fig. 29>
Next, the test-firing test signal terminal management process (step S822) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the trial-fire test signal terminal management process.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine for which a third-party testing agency (designated testing agency based on the provisions of Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Law Concerning Regulation of Amusement Business, etc. and Optimization of Business) is an appropriate gaming machine. A "type test signal" capable of specifying the control state of the gaming machine can be output from the frame external terminal board 21 in correspondence with the type test for determining whether or not the game machine is in the state of being controlled. In addition, the gaming machine provided for model testing is provided with a dedicated connection terminal (testing device information terminal) for connecting to the testing device. It is possible to carry out a type test. In addition, when a gaming machine that conforms to the model test is installed in a pachinko hall, it is not permitted to change the control program that conforms to it. Although it will be repeatedly executed for each interrupt, the dedicated connection terminal is not mounted on mass-produced game machines, and it seems that it cannot be used as the outer end signal for the data counter DT or hall computer HC. It has become. Therefore, the model test signal is different from the outer end signals such as the mid-jackpot signal and the short-time jackpot signal.

In this test-fire test signal terminal management process, the game information (test information) necessary for the model test is stored in a 1-byte length external output buffer (corresponding to the test-fire test device information terminal ports 1 to 5) provided in the RAM outside the area. It acquires the information (for example, flag ON/OFF information) and supplies it to 8-bit output ports (test firing test equipment information terminal ports 1 to 5), and outputs various test information to the outside as a model test signal. It's like In this embodiment, the following 1st information to 5th information are acquired as test information, and these information can be output from the test-fire test device information terminals (test-fire test device information terminal ports 1 to 5). It's becoming The CPU 201 acquires various data (such as flags stored according to the processing state of normal game progress) stored in the area RAM, and transmits the game information necessary for the model test to the test device. ing.

In FIG. 29, the CPU 201 first executes first information acquisition processing for acquiring first information (step S601). This first information is, as illustrated, a specific error type flag (b0), a normal pattern per flag (b1), a normal pattern probability fluctuation flag (b2), a normal pattern time saving state flag (b3), a normal electric accessory They are an operating flag (b4), a general electric role product open extended state flag (b5), a normal symbol fluctuating flag (b6), and a test signal special symbol 2 small hit flag (b7). Note that b7 to b0 (most significant bit b7 to least significant bit b0) in parentheses indicate bit numbers corresponding to each piece of information (the same applies to second information to fifth information described later).

In the first information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not a specific error has occurred. As a specific error, here, the state of the input port related to the state signal is checked, and if the ball clogged signal, supply shortage signal, counting error signal, door open signal, etc. are generated, the least significant bit b0 is set to 1. (H). Then, the normal symbol per flag (b1), the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag (b2), the normal symbol time saving state flag (b3), the normal electric accessory operating flag (b4), the general electric accessory open extended state flag (b5) , Normal symbol fluctuating flag (b6), and special symbol 2 small hit flag for test signal (b7) are acquired, and if the flag value is OFF state (00H), the corresponding bit is 0 (L), ON state If it is (5AH), 1 (H) is set in the corresponding bit (the same applies to second information to fifth information described later). For example, a specific error has not occurred, probability variable state (normal symbol probability fluctuation flag ON, normal symbol time saving state flag ON, general electric role open extended state flag ON), general electric open game (normal symbol per flag ON, normal electric The game status of the role product operating flag ON, the normal symbol fluctuation flag OFF (the normal symbol is stopped by the auxiliary winning symbol), and the special figure 2 is a small winning state (special symbol 2 small winning flag for test signal ON) Then, the bit pattern related to the first information is "10111110". Then, information about the ON/OFF state of various flags related to the first information is output to the test-firing apparatus information terminal port 1 (step S602). The form of transmission to the test apparatus may be either serial form or parallel form (the same applies to steps S603 to S610 described later). As a result, various types of information belonging to the first information are output as the type test signal. Therefore, the type test signal type output to the test device corresponding to each bit in this process is "game machine error state signal (b0) ~ special symbol 2 small Win signal (b7)”.

Next, second information acquisition processing for acquiring second information is performed (step S603). This second information is a condition device operation flag (b0), a role product continuous operation device operation flag (b1), a special symbol 1 big hit flag for test signal (b2), a special symbol probability fluctuation flag (b3), a special symbol time saving They are a state flag (b4), a special symbol 1 fluctuating flag (b5), and a special electric accessory 1 operation flag (b6), and the highest bit b7 is unused. The above-mentioned "special electric role product 1 operation flag" is a flag used to determine whether the upper special variable winning device 42 (upper big winning opening 40 side for big hits) is in operation, and the flag is When the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the special variable winning device 42 is in operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), the upper special variable winning device 42 is not in operation. Indicates that it is in progress. In addition, during the period in which the flag is ON (=5AH) between round games, that is, the period in which the upper special variable winning device 42 is in operation, the big winning port 40 is opened after the big winning port 40 is opened. After closing, it is a period until the remaining ball ejection time (a margin time for game balls to be ejected from the big winning opening: 1980 ms) passes, and otherwise it is in the OFF state (= 00H). . In addition to the above "special electric accessory 1 operation flag", a "special electric accessory 2 operation flag" is provided, and this "special electric accessory 2 operation flag" is the lower special variable winning device 52 (small A flag used to determine whether or not the lower big winning port 40 for winning is in operation, and when the flag is ON (=5AH), the lower special variable winning device 52 operates When the flag is OFF (=00H), it indicates that the lower special variable winning device 52 is not in operation.

Then, the ON/OFF states of various flags related to the second information are output to the test-firing apparatus information terminal port 2 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S604). As a result, various types of information belonging to the second information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this process is listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 2 shown in the figure. is unused)”.

Next, third information acquisition processing for acquiring third information is performed (step S605). This third information includes normal symbol numbers (b0 to b2), special symbol 2 big hit flag for test signal (b3), special symbol probability fluctuation flag (b4), special symbol time saving state flag (b5), and special symbol 2 fluctuation. Medium flag (b6), and special electric accessory 2 operation flag (b7). The normal symbol number (normal stop symbol number) is data specifying the normal stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a. Here, the lower 3 bits are used to specify the normal stop symbol number.

Then, the normal stop pattern number and the ON/OFF states of various flags related to the third information are output to the test-firing test apparatus information terminal port 3 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S606). As a result, various types of information belonging to the third information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this process is "normal stop pattern number (b0 to b2) to special electric accessory 2 operating signal (b7)" listed in the field of the test firing test device information terminal port 3 shown in the figure. It should be noted that the special symbol fluctuating flag (special symbol 1 fluctuating flag or special symbol 2 fluctuating flag) is, of course, ON during the fluctuation display, and is maintained ON even during the interruption of measurement of the fluctuation time. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, the output state of the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is maintained during the period when the special figure 1 is interrupting the measurement, and the output state of the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is maintained during the period when the special figure 2 is interrupting the measurement. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there is a small hit only on the special figure 2 side, the measurement is interrupted only on the special figure 1 side. Further, in the case of the forced loss stop, since the stop display is forced with the loss symbols, the special symbol fluctuating flag is turned off, and the output of the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is stopped.

Next, fourth information acquisition processing for acquiring fourth information is performed (step S607). This fourth information is the special stop symbol number of special figure 1 (special symbol 1 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7). Here, 1 byte or less is used to specify the special stop design number of special figure 2.

Then, the information capable of specifying the special symbol 1 stop symbol number related to the fourth information is output to the test-firing apparatus information terminal port 4 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S608). As a result, various types of information belonging to the fourth information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this process is the "special symbol 1 data (signal that can specify the special symbol 1 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7)" listed in the field of the test firing test device information terminal port 4 shown.

Next, fifth information acquisition processing for acquiring fifth information is performed (step S609). This fifth information is the special stop symbol number of special figure 2 (special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7). Here, 1 byte or less is used to specify the special stop design number of special figure 2.

Then, the information capable of specifying the special symbol 1 stop symbol number related to the fifth information is output to the test-firing apparatus information terminal port 5 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S610). As a result, various types of information belonging to the fifth information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this process is "special symbol 2 data (a signal that can specify the special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7)" listed in the field of the test firing test device information terminal port 5 shown in the figure. When the process of step S610 is finished, the process exits from the trial-fire test signal terminal management process.

It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately determine how to combine the various types of information of the above-mentioned first to fifth information and from which test-fire tester information terminal port to output to the model tester. Also, the test information is not limited to the first information to the fifth information, and can be appropriately determined as necessary.

<30 A. Out-of-area RAM check processing: Fig. 30A>
Next, the out-of-area RAM check processing (step S824) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30A (A) is a flowchart showing the details of the out-of-area RAM check processing according to this embodiment, and FIG. 30A (B) is a flowchart showing a modification of the out-of-area RAM check processing. This out-of-area RAM check process is a process (common process) that is executed not only during the performance display monitor process of FIG. 28 but also during the performance display monitor aggregate division process (step S040) of FIG. 8A.

In this out-of-area RAM check process, it is checked whether or not the process related to the performance display has been executed correctly (step S841), and whether or not the data in the RAM area related to the performance display is corrupted or not is checked (step S842). ), and if there is an abnormality, a data initialization process for clearing the measurement data is executed (step S843).

In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the check data is the initial normal value (AA55H) (step S831). This check data is data monitored in the process of comparing and judging the number R of all-out outs and the number S of outs under normal conditions (out-ball number confirmation process: not shown). If the number S of outs during normal operation is large (R<S), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred, and "00H" is set as the value indicating the abnormality of the check data. If this check data is not a normal value (AA55H) (step S831: NO), the process advances to step S843 to execute data initialization processing, which will be described later.

If the check data are normal values (step S841: YES), then it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the count data (step S842). A case where an abnormality occurs in the count data is, for example, a case where the switch input data indicates an abnormal value, or a case where the arithmetic processing required for calculating the performance information is not correctly executed. A typical example of the case where the arithmetic processing is not correctly executed is the case where the arithmetic processing (ball number counting processing) for the sensor related to the calculation of the performance information is not correctly performed. The sensors to be counted in this embodiment are the middle start sensor 33a, the right start sensor 34a, the lower right start sensor 35a, the general winning sensor 43a, the lower large winning sensor 52a (the upper large winning sensor 42a). is excluded because it is a detection sensor related to the upper big winning opening 40 for big hits), and the OUT monitoring switch 49a. Therefore, whether the "ball number counting process" for all these sensors, specifically, the winning ball number addition process (not shown) and the out ball number addition process (not shown) were executed correctly No is determined.

The number-of-balls count process is executed in the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S040) in the main process shown in FIG. 8, as already described. In this number-of-balls counting process, first, five sensors, ie, the middle start sensor 33a, the right start sensor 34a, the lower right start sensor 35a, the general winning sensor 43a, and the lower large winning sensor 52a, are targeted for winning. The presence or absence of a prize is checked in order, and if a prize is confirmed, the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls. is added by 1 (sensor detection number counter + 1). Specifically, when the number-of-balls addition process related to the middle start sensor 33a is completed, the sensor detection counter is incremented by 1, and the value is updated to "01H". When the prize ball addition process is completed, the value of the sensor detection number counter is incremented by 1 and updated to "02H", . The number counter is updated to "05H". Finally, out-ball number addition processing is performed for the OUT monitoring switch 49a, and when this out-ball number addition processing is completed, the sensor detection counter is cleared to zero (00H). Therefore, the range of values that the sensor detection number counter can take when the above-described ball counting process (winning ball number addition process, out ball number addition process) is completed is "00H" to "05H", and the ball count process is performed. When the (last out ball number addition process) is correctly completed, the sensor detection number counter should be set to "00H". However, if this value becomes a value other than "00H" to "05H" due to some trouble, or if the value is other than "00H" when starting the processing for adding the number of prize balls to the middle start opening sensor 33a, etc. , the count data is determined to be invalid (abnormal) (step S842:=out of range), and data initialization processing is executed (step S843). On the other hand, if the count data is valid (step S832: within the range), it is determined to be normal, skipping the data initialization processing of step S843 and exiting the out-of-area RAM check processing.

In the data initialization process of step S843, the initial value (normal value) "AA55H" is set in the check data, the RAM area related to the performance display (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) is cleared, and the current Clears the display data being displayed. However, of the RAM area related to the performance display, only the measurement information storage area may be cleared. The reason for this is that the data saved in the performance display storage area usually contains the previous base value data (if this is the first measurement, the specific value for the test section is saved (data This is because this data is considered to be the result of the previous correct processing being saved.In addition, the operation check timer may also be cleared.It should be noted that if it is judged to be abnormal, Even if the data initialization process is executed, only an error is displayed on the performance indicator 99, and a new base value is calculated without executing special error processing such as stopping the game or not measuring a new base value. Subsequent processing (steps S824 to S829 in FIG. 28) is then performed.

It should be noted that when the data initialization process of step S843 is executed, an error notification (base value count error notification) may be performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes). In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be displayed in an error-only display mode. Also, even during the error display, a new base value is measured (normal payout count, normal out count, total out count, and base value calculation). The error display period may be a predetermined time period, or a predetermined game period, for example, a predetermined number of normal payout numbers, normal out numbers, or all state out numbers (error cancellation number: for example, 100). or a period until a new normal state arrives (a period until a new measurement target section arrives). Of course, a new measurement may not be started during the error display period, and a new measurement may be started after the error display ends. Turning on the power again may be used as the error resolution condition.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM area related to the performance display is checked in the performance display monitor aggregate division process (step S040 in FIG. 8B) and the performance display monitor process (step S101 in FIG. 13), and if there is a problem At least, after initializing the outside RAM area (measurement information storage area) storing the measurement data necessary for calculating the performance information, the measurement is started from the initial state. Also, the outside RAM area related to the performance display is not the object of the RAM check when the power is turned on, that is, the RAM initialization process of step S021 in FIG. 8A and step S028 in FIG. 8B. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contents of the RAM in the area, the data related to the performance display are not collectively initialized (cleared), and only the data related to the normal progress of the game is initialized independently. . Therefore, as long as the backup function operates normally and the game machine operates normally, even if there is no problem with the memory contents of the RAM area related to the performance display, it will be permanent even if it is several days or several years. The data can be held for a long time, and performance information can be held and displayed for a long period of time.

(Modified example of out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30A (B))
The out-of-area RAM check processing in FIG. 30A(A) can be configured as follows.

FIG. 30A(B) shows the configuration of the out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 30A(A), the data initialization process of step S843, the process of clearing the operation confirmation timer to zero, and the operation confirmation timer of step S844 set to 5000 ms. This is the addition of processing to Other processing contents are the same as those in FIG. 30A(A).

In the configuration of FIG. 30A(B), as shown in the figure, if the determination result in step S841 is NO and the determination result in step S842 is determined to be out of range due to a problem such as data, a check is performed as data initialization processing in step S843. Clears the RAM area related to data and performance display (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.), clears the display data currently being displayed, and clears the operation confirmation timer. Then, the operation confirmation timer is reset to 5000 ms (step S844). Therefore, in the case of this modified example, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the out-of-area RAM, the operation confirmation display is executed again for 5 seconds after the RAM is initialized. This point is different from the configuration of FIG. 30A(A) in which the operation confirmation display is executed only when power is restored. Note that if the operation confirmation timer is not reset in this modified example, when the data initialization process is executed, if the operation confirmation display is in progress, the display will be forcibly terminated. After that, the performance indicator 99 displays the real-time base value and the history base value.

<30B. Out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30B>
Next, the operation confirmation process (step S833) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation process.

In FIG. 30B, the CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the operation confirmation timer and adds 1 to the flashing timer (steps S851 and S852).

Next, it is determined whether or not the flashing switching timing has come (step S853). In this embodiment, during the operation confirmation display, the light-off period and the light-on period are repeated at a predetermined cycle of, for example, 300 ms. This flashing switching timing is managed by a flashing timer. In this embodiment, the blinking timer is incremented by 1 for every 4 ms interrupt. If the switching timing is a cycle of 300 ms, it can be determined that the flashing switching timing has arrived depending on whether the value of the flashing timer is "75". If the flashing switching timing has not arrived (step S853: NO), nothing is done, that is, the operation confirmation process is exited while maintaining the current lighting or extinguishing state.

On the other hand, if the flashing switching timing has arrived (step S853: YES), the flashing timer is cleared (step S854), and the update cycle counter is updated (step S856). The update period counter is used as a counter for determining whether it is lighting or blinking. For example, if the update cycle counter is an 8-bit counter that cycles through the range of 0 to 255 by incrementing (step S856 corresponds), lighting control is performed when the least significant bit of the value of the update cycle counter is '0'. If the value is '1', it is possible to perform blinking control such as extinguishing control.

Next, the update period counter is referenced to determine whether the value is "0" or "1" (step S856). In the case of this embodiment, when the operation confirmation display is started, the update cycle counter is controlled to zero and the performance indicator 99 is controlled to be fully lit. Therefore, when this process is passed first, the value of the update period counter is updated to "1" in the process of step S856, so the process proceeds to step S857 (step S856:=1), and the identification is displayed. The extinguishing data, that is, "0000H" is set in the display output buffer and the base display output buffer (steps S857 and S858). These lights-out data are directly written into each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like. As a result, the light-on period ends and the light-off period occurs.

On the other hand, when the next flashing switching timing has arrived (step S853: YES) and the update cycle counter is "0" (step S856:=0), the processing proceeds to step S859, and the output buffer for the identification display unit and The lighting data, that is, "FFFFH" is set in the output buffer for the base display section (steps S859 and S860). These lighting data are also written directly to each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like . As a result, the light-off period ends and the light-on period occurs. In this embodiment, when performing the operation confirmation display, for example, by simply setting a predetermined data value in each output buffer without referring to the LED data table as shown in FIG. 37 used for normal display control. Therefore, the operation confirmation display (all blinking) can be realized by simple processing.

By the operation confirmation process described above, the performance indicator 99 is completely flashed (operation confirmation display) by repeating all lighting and all extinguishing for a predetermined time (for 5000 ms), and the operation of the performance indicator 99 can be checked visually. . If the performance indicator 99 does not display normal operation confirmation, for example, if part of the 7-segment indicator remains off due to wire breakage or the like, appropriate measures such as part replacement may be taken.

Even during the operation check process, the performance display monitor tally division process (S040 in FIG. 8B) is executed, and at least the count process necessary for calculating the base value is executed. As a result, it is possible to accurately reflect the winning ball and the out ball during operation confirmation in the base value displayed after the operation confirmation display. However, since the base value is not displayed during the operation confirmation display, the calculation of the base value may or may not be performed for 5000 ms during the operation confirmation display. In addition, during the operation confirmation process, a determination process is provided to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the performance indicator 99, and when an abnormality occurs, a special error command (operation confirmation display error command) is issued by the production control unit. 24 may be provided. When the performance control unit 24 receives the operation confirmation display error command, it is possible to notify that the performance indicator 99 is abnormal by using the performance means. For example, along with the warning sound, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as "There is an abnormality in the performance indicator 99." As a result, for example, there is no fear of overlooking defects such as decimal points DP that are difficult to visually confirm.

<30C. Display data update process: Fig. 30C>
Next, the display data update process (step S831) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30C is a flowchart showing details of display data update processing.

In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether the display period of the base value is the test section, the first (N=1) measurement section, or the subsequent measurement section (N≧2). According to one of a plurality of display intervals, such as whether it is a value display interval or a history base value display interval, identification display unit display pattern data is acquired from the identification display unit LED data table (step S871), and identification It is set in the display unit output buffer (step S872). In this embodiment, two types of base value output periods are provided: a first base value output period for displaying the real-time base value and a second base value output period for displaying the history base value, and they are switched every 5000 ms. It's becoming In addition, as shown in FIG. 37(a), the identification display unit LED data table contains display pattern data corresponding to the identification display of "bL." 7 segments), the lower "10111000B" (for the 7 segments of 'L' display), and the display pattern data corresponding to the display of the identification display part of "b6."b' display for 7 segments), and lower "11111101B" (for '6.' display 7 segments)) are stored.

Also, according to the base value at that time (the base value during real-time measurement), the display pattern data for the base display unit is obtained from the decimal value LED data table (step S873) and set in the output buffer for the base display unit. (Step S874). As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the decimal value LED data table stores 1-byte length display pattern data corresponding to 10 kinds of values 0 to 9. FIG. For example, in the first base value output period for displaying the real-time base value, if the first base value at that time is "35", the display data in the tens place is "3" from the decimal value LED data table. , and '01101101B' corresponding to "5" is obtained as display data in the ones place and set in the output buffer for the base display section.

By the above display update processing, the real-time base value and the previous history base value are periodically switched (for example, every 5000 ms) and displayed on the performance display 99 after all blinking (operation check) is completed. display can be realized.

(Concrete example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 after power-on: FIG. 38)
FIG. 38 shows the performance during various periods at the time of RAM initialization (RAM clear), setting change, RAM abnormality (setting value data abnormality, backup flag abnormality), setting confirmation, and backup restoration. The display mode of the indicator 99 is shown. However, FIG. 38 exemplifies the display mode when one of the four 7-segment displays of the performance display 99 is configured to function as the setting display 97 .

In this embodiment, except for when the RAM is abnormal, the area RAM initialization process (step S028 in FIG. 8B), the setting change process (step S022 in FIG. 8B, FIG. 11), the setting confirmation process (step S026 in FIG. 8B, FIG. 12), or after the backup return processing (step S027 in FIG. 8B) is completed, the main control unit side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) is activated and the operation confirmation period is started, and the performance indicator 99 is displayed for 5 seconds After all blinking (confirmation display) is performed, the base value is displayed (steps S032 to S035 in FIG. 8B, step S833 in FIG. 28). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, during the RAM clear notification effect such as "RAM is being cleared" at the time of RAM clearing, during the setting change effect such as "The setting is being changed" at the time of setting change (during the setting change operation period) ), and during the power-on instruction production (during the power-on waiting period) such as "RAM error, please turn on the power again and change the setting value" at the time of RAM abnormality, it is before the start of the operation check period. Therefore, the display of the performance indicator 99 is completely turned off or in a non-display state. However, one of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance indicator 99 functions as the setting indicator 97 during the setting confirmation effect (during the setting confirmation period) and during the setting change effect (during the setting change operation period). Therefore, the set value information is displayed (see the column labeled "set value display" in the drawing). In the case of a RAM abnormality, the system is placed in a state of waiting for power re-on (step S019 in FIG. 8A, FIG. 10B), and the game operation is stopped until the power is re-applied. remains completely unlit (not displayed) (see the column of power reactivation display in the figure).

In addition, when clearing the RAM, changing settings, confirming settings, or returning to backup, during the customer waiting waiting effect (during the customer waiting demo screen display) after each process, the operation confirmation display will be displayed for 5 seconds When all flashing of has finished, the display of the base value is started thereafter. In addition, when changing settings, all blinking for 5 seconds will start when the setting change operation is completed. All blinking for 5 seconds ends during the completion effect, and the display of the base value starts. Therefore, in this case, an overlapping display period occurs between the setting change completion rendering and the base value display. Other effects, for example, restoration completion effects (not shown) that display "restored from power outage, please restart game" when restoring backup, similarly, if it continues for 5 seconds or more, the restoration All blinking for 5 seconds ends during the completion effect, and the display of the base value starts.

Note that the RAM error notification at the time of RAM clearing is executed with the highest priority over other notification effects, and even if the effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 during the execution of the RAM error notification, the RAM error notification is performed. is not terminated (after 30 seconds of the RAM clear notification timer), other effects are not executed. Also, if the RAM clear notification timer (see step S030 in FIG. 8B) does not elapse, the process will not proceed any further, and all lights will remain off (not displayed) during the RAM error notification. However, if the RAM clear notification timer simply counts the RAM error notification time to proceed with the subsequent processing, all blinks for 5 seconds from the start of the RAM error notification, after which the display of the base value starts. become.

In each embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine using game balls as a game medium has been described, but there is no particular limitation as long as the game machine can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine that uses game medals as a game medium, a game machine that uses a game medium that uses electromagnetic recording (a game machine such as a so-called "enclosed game machine (management type game machine)"), a reel It may be a game machine or the like. Also, as long as the object of the present invention is achieved and the effect is produced, it is not limited to the simultaneous variation type, but it is naturally applicable to a type of game machine that does not change the other special symbol when one special symbol is displayed in a variable display. can be applied.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 front frame,
3 game board,
3a play area,
4 outer frame,
6 glass doors,
9 upper saucer,
15 firing operation handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 main control unit (main control board),
24 production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 payout control board,
32 launcher,
34, 34a upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
36 liquid crystal display device,
37, 37a normal symbol start opening, normal symbol start opening sensor,
38a, 38b special pattern display device,
39a normal pattern display device,
50, 52a large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41 normal fluctuation winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessories solenoid,
52 special variable winning device,
52c big prize opening solenoid,
43 general prize gates,
43a general winning opening sensor,
45 decorative lamps,
46 speakers,
47 movable winglets,
49 out port,
60 full detection sensor,
61 front door open sensor,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 setting change completion switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 performance indicator,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 production control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

Lottery means for executing a lottery for winning based on establishment of a starting condition;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, a winning game control means for controlling to a winning game;
information display means capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on game performance;
information display control means for controlling the information display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The information display control means is
After the power is turned on, a confirmation display for displaying a first display based on the first data and a second display based on the second data alternately for a predetermined time as a confirmation display for confirming the operation on the information display means. and a predetermined information display process for displaying the predetermined information on the information display means after executing the confirmation display for a predetermined time,
a first information storage area for storing an operation timer for timing execution time of the confirmation display;
a second information storage area for storing a switching timer for timing switching between the first display and the second display in the confirmation display;
configured to execute switching processing between the first data and the second data when the switching timer reaches a predetermined value ;
configured to initialize the operation timer of the first information storage area and the switching timer of the second information storage area after power-on including recovery from power failure;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images